Garmin Software Version 1983 00 Pilots Guide

2015-05-27

: Garmin Garmin-Software-Version-1983-00-Pilots-Guide-720867 garmin-software-version-1983-00-pilots-guide-720867 garmin pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 582

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

G1000 Integrated Avionics System
®

7
5

D.C.
ELEC.

29.9

10
5

VERTICAL SPEED
100 FEET PER MINUTE

NO PITCH
INFORMATION

Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411 f:503.364.2138

Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House,
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire
SO40 9LR U.K.
p:44 (0) 23 8052 4000
f:44 (0) 23 8052 4004
Aviation Support:44 (0) 87 0850 1243

Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099

www.garmin.com

240

190-01461-01
Revision A

11900

225

11800

210

11700
10

200

1
500

11600
2

360‘

190

N
33

29.86IN

GPS

ENR

E
12

Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200 f:913.397.8282

Piper PA-44-180
Seminole

12000

250

TAS 269KT

DOWN

TURN COORDINATOR

2 MIN.

In Hg

29.8

ALT

260

Piper PA-44-180
Seminole
S
21

18000

FEET

G1000 Pilot’s Guide

100

PILOT’S GUIDE

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

AUDIO PANEL & CNS

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

APPENDICES

INDEX

Copyright © 2013, 2014 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 1983.00 or later. Some differences in operation may be observed when
comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200 Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411 Fax: 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9LR, U.K
Tel: 44 (0) 23 8052 4000 Fax: 44 (0) 23 8052 4004 Aviation Support:44 (0) 87 0850 1243
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199 Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
For after-hours emergency, aircraft on ground (AOG) technical support for Garmin panel mount and integrated avionics systems, please
contact Garmin’s AOG Hotline at 913.397.0836.
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Garmin® and G1000® are registered trademarks of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. FliteCharts®, SafeTaxi®, and Garmin ESP™ are trademarks
of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio are provided by SiriusXM Satellite
Radio, Inc.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for any
incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even if
AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee
October 2014

Printed in the U.S.A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance

feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be

relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by G1000 GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and

could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74A Air Data
Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always
use pressure altitude displayed by the G1000 PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the G1000 system must be updated

regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data is

intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.

The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic

within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for hazardous

weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or
incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous

weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather

information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

WARNING: For safety reasons, G1000 operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
WARNING: The Garmin G1000, as installed in this aircraft, has a very high degree of functional integrity.

However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable
system failures is not practical.
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible

for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin G1000 utilize GPS as a precision electronic
NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the G1000 can be
misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the G1000

Pilot’s Guide documentation and the G1000 Integrated Avionics System in the Airplane Flight Manual.
Thoroughly practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications
from the G1000 to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual
sightings, charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: Do not use the system to attempt to penetrate a thunderstorm. The illustrations in this guide are

only examples. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical Information
Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding any thunderstorm identified as severe of giving intense radar echo by
at least 20 miles.
WARNING: Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of

according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the G1000 within the following

areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes; South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia);
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand)
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a

system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very

sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The Garmin G1000 does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by

an authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty
and the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
NOTE: When using Stormscope, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to nearby

thunderstorms that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters of
two or more discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points
reappear after the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.

Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the G1000 panel and

displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current G1000 system and aviation databases.
Depictions of equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of

attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California

to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

iii

WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES

NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the

following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.
• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen are assured compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs) by virtue
of a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA. A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each database
and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Type 2 LOA Status.’
• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed

in SAIB CE-14-04 to determine what data may be incomplete. The database exclusion list can be viewed at
www.flygarmin.com by selecting ‘Database Exclusions List.’
NOTE: The pilot/operator must have access to Garmin and Jeppesen database alerts and consider their

impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’
NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support to

coordinate the revised DQRs.
NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.

These discrepancies could come in the form of an incorrect procedure; incorrectly identified terrain, obstacles
and fixes; or any other displayed item used for navigation or communication in the air or on the ground. Go
to FlyGarmin.com and select ‘Report An Aviation Data Error Report.’

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-01461-00
190-01461-01

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Revision
A
A

Date
6/7/13
10/8/14

Page Range
i – I-6
Initial Release
i – I-6
Initial Release

Description

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

TABLE OF CONTENTS

1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4

1.5

1.6

1.7

SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Line Replaceable Units............................................ 2
Secure Digital (SD) Cards........................................ 6
System Power-up...................................................... 7
System Operation..................................................... 8
Display Operation.......................................................... 8
G1000 System Annunciations......................................... 9
System Status.............................................................. 10
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 12
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 13
G1000 Controls....................................................... 18
PFD/MFD Controls....................................................... 18
Additional MFD Controls (Garmin AFCS Installed)........... 20
Softkey Function.......................................................... 21
Accessing G1000 Functionality............................ 28
Menus........................................................................ 28
Data Entry.................................................................. 28
Page Groups............................................................... 30
System Settings........................................................... 34
System Utilities............................................................ 43
Display Backlighting.............................................. 47

SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................. 52
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 52
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 54
Altimeter.................................................................... 55
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 58
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 58
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 59
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 64
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data..................................... 71
Temperature Displays................................................... 71
Wind Data.................................................................. 72
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 73
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions......... 74
System Annunciations.................................................. 74
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 75
Traffic Annunciation..................................................... 75
TAWS Annunciations.................................................... 76
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 76

Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 77
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 77

2.4 Abnormal Operations............................................ 79
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 79
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 80
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
3.1 Engine Display........................................................ 82
3.2 Engine Page............................................................ 84
Electrical..................................................................... 86
Exhaust Gas Temperature Bar Graph............................. 86
Fuel Calculations......................................................... 87
Oil Pressure and Temperature Gauges............................ 89
Fuel Quantity.............................................................. 89
Landing Gear Indications.............................................. 90
EIS Display (Reversionary Mode)................................... 91
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.1 Overview................................................................. 93
PFD Controls and Frequency Display.............................. 94
GMA 1347 Audio Panel Controls................................... 96
4.2 COM Operation....................................................... 98
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation...................... 98
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................... 99
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz................... 100
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency................................. 101
Auto-tuning from the MFD......................................... 102
Frequency Spacing..................................................... 105
Automatic Squelch..................................................... 106
Volume..................................................................... 106
4.3 NAV Operation...................................................... 107
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 107
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 108
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD................ 110
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation.. 114
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 115
4.4 GTX 33 Mode S Transponder............................... 116
Transponder Controls................................................. 116
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 117
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 119
IDENT Function......................................................... 120
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 121

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions...................... 122
Power-Up.................................................................. 122
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 122
Speaker.................................................................... 122
Intercom................................................................... 123
Passenger Address (PA) System................................... 125
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 125
Split COM Operation.................................................. 126
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 127
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure........................ 128
4.7 Abnormal Operation............................................ 129
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 129
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 129
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.................................. 129
PFD Failure (Reversionary Mode)................................ 129
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 Introduction.......................................................... 131
Navigation Status Box................................................ 132
5.2 Using Map Displays.............................................. 134
Map Orientation........................................................ 134
Map Range............................................................... 136
Map Panning............................................................. 138
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 142
Topography............................................................... 143
Map Symbols............................................................ 146
Airways.................................................................... 152
Track Vector.............................................................. 154
Wind Vector.............................................................. 155
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 156
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 157
Field of View (SVS)..................................................... 158
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.................................... 159
5.3 Waypoints.............................................................. 160
Airports.................................................................... 161
Intersections............................................................. 168
NDBs........................................................................ 170
VORs........................................................................ 172
User Waypoints......................................................... 174
5.4 Airspaces............................................................... 180
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation ........................................... 184

190-01461-01 Rev. A

5.6 Flight Planning...................................................... 190
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 191
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 196
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 198
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 201
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 208
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 210
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 213
Parallel Track............................................................. 215
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 218
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 219
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 220
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 222
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 222
5.7 Vertical Navigation.............................................. 227
Altitude Constraints................................................... 229
5.8 Procedures............................................................ 233
Departures................................................................ 233
Arrivals .................................................................... 236
Approaches .............................................................. 238
5.9 Trip Planning......................................................... 246
Trip Planning............................................................. 246
Weight Planning........................................................ 250
Weight Caution And Warning Conditions..................... 252
5.10 RAIM Prediction................................................... 253
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan...................................... 257
5.12 Abnormal Operation............................................ 285
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SiriusXM Weather................................................. 288
Activating Services..................................................... 288
Using SiriusXM Weather Products............................... 289
SiriusXM Weather Abnormal Operations...................... 323
6.2 Terrain Proximity.................................................. 325
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data................................ 325
6.3 Profile View Terrain.............................................. 330
Profile View Display................................................... 331
6.4 Terrain-SVS............................................................ 334
Displaying Terrain-SVS Data........................................ 335
Terrain-SVS Page....................................................... 338
Terrain-SVS Alerts...................................................... 339
System Status............................................................ 343

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.5 TAWS-B.................................................................. 344
Displaying TAWS-B Data............................................. 345
TAWS-B Page............................................................ 348
TAWS-B Alerts........................................................... 350
System Status............................................................ 356
6.6 Traffic Information Service (TIS)......................... 358
Displaying TRAFFIC Data............................................ 359
Traffic Map Page........................................................ 361
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 362
System Status............................................................ 364
6.7 GTS 800 Traffic...................................................... 366
Theory of operation................................................... 366
TAS Alerts................................................................. 370
System Test............................................................... 371
Operation................................................................. 372
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 Basic Autopilot Operation................................... 382
7.2 AFCS Controls....................................................... 383
7.3 Flight Director Operation.................................... 385
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 385
AFCS Status Box........................................................ 386
Flight Director Modes................................................. 387
Command Bars.......................................................... 387
7.4 Vertical Modes...................................................... 388
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)................................................ 389
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)........................ 390
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)........................................... 391
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)........................................... 392
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC).................................. 393
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH, ALTV)...................... 394
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)................... 397
Glidepath Mode (GP)................................................. 398
Glideslope Mode (GS)................................................ 400
Takeoff (TO) and Go Around (GA) Modes..................... 401
7.5 Lateral Modes....................................................... 402
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)................................................ 403
Heading Select Mode (HDG)....................................... 404
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)....................... 405

viii

Approach Modes (GPS, VAPP, LOC).............................. 407
intercepting and flying a dme arc................................ 408

7.6 Autopilot Operation............................................. 409
Flight Control............................................................ 409
Engagement.............................................................. 409
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 410
Disengagement......................................................... 410
Level Mode............................................................... 411
Underspeed Protection............................................... 412
7.7 Example Flight Plan............................................. 414
Departure................................................................. 414
Intercepting a VOR Radial........................................... 416
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course.................................. 417
Descent.................................................................... 418
Approach.................................................................. 422
Go Around/Missed Approach...................................... 426
7.8 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts.......................... 428
AFCS Status Alerts..................................................... 428
Overspeed Protection................................................. 429
7.9 Abnormal Operation............................................ 430
Suspected Autopilot Malfunction................................ 430
Overpowering Autopilot Servos................................... 430
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)...................... 432
SVT Operation........................................................... 433
SVT Features............................................................. 435
Field of View............................................................. 444
8.2 SafeTaxi................................................................. 446
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision........................... 449
8.3 ChartView.............................................................. 452
ChartView Softkeys.................................................... 453
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 454
Chart Options............................................................ 462
Day/Night View......................................................... 468
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 470
8.4 FliteCharts............................................................. 473
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 474
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 475

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chart Options............................................................ 482
Day/Night View......................................................... 486
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 488

8.5 Airport Directory.................................................. 491
Airport Directory Database Cycle Number and Revision.492
8.6 SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment............ 494
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 494
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 495
8.7 Scheduler............................................................... 499
8.8 Flight Data Logging............................................. 501
8.9 Electronic Stability & Protection (ESP™)............ 503
Roll Engagement....................................................... 504
Pitch Engagement..................................................... 506
High Airspeed Protection............................................ 506
8.10 Abnormal Operation............................................ 507
SVT Troubleshooting.................................................. 507
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 507
Unusual Attitudes...................................................... 508
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts.............................................. 511
CAS Annunciations.................................................... 512
G1000 System Annunciations..................................... 514
G1000 System Message Advisories.............................. 516
Voice Alerts............................................................... 525
AFCS Alerts............................................................... 526
Terrain-SVS Alerts...................................................... 527
Terrain-SVS System Status Annunciations..................... 527
TAWS-B ALERTS......................................................... 528
TAWS-B System Status Annunciations.......................... 529
Flight Plan Import/Export Messages............................ 529
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages........................... 530
Database Management................................................. 531
Jeppesen Databases................................................... 532
Garmin Databases..................................................... 536
Garmin Aviation Glossary............................................. 543
Frequently Asked Questions......................................... 551
General TIS Information................................................ 555
Map Symbols.................................................................. 557
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

TABLE OF CONTENTS

Blank Page

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G1000 Integrated Avionics System presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation, communication,
and identification information to the pilot using flat-panel color displays. The system is distributed across the
following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):

EIS

• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Display (PFD)
• GDU 1040 Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GMA 1347 Audio Panel with Integrated Marker Beacon Receiver
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU)
• GDC 74A Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder
• GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The G1000 is capable of interfacing with the following optional equipment:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• GDL 69A Data Link Receiver
• GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System
• GDU 1044B Multi Function Display (MFD)
• GSA 80/81 AFCS Servos
• GSM 86 Servo Gearboxes
KN 63 DME
KR 87 ADF
Figure 1-1 shows interactions between the LRUs.

AFCS

The Garmin Automated Flight Control System (AFCS) provides the flight director (FD) and autopilot (AP)
functions of the G1000 system.
NOTE: Refer to the AFCS section for details on the Garmin AFCS.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.1 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• GDU 1040 (1) – The left GDU is configured a a Primary Flight Displays (PFD). It features a 10.4-inch LCD
screen with 1024 x 768 resolution. The displays communicate with each other through a High-Speed Data Bus
(HSDB) Ethernet connection. Each display is also paired with an Ethernet connection to an IAU.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• GDU 1040/1044B (1) – The middle GDU is configured as a Multi Function Display (MFD). It features a 10.4inch LCD screens with 1024 x 768 resolution. The displays communicate with each other through a HighSpeed Data Bus (HSDB) Ethernet connection. The GDU 1044 is used when the Garmin AFCS is installed.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• GMA 1347 (1) – The Audio Panel integrates navigation/communication radio (NAV/COM) digital audio,
intercom, and marker beacon controls, and is installed between the displays. This unit also provides manual
control of display reversionary mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP Button; see Section 1.5, System Operation) and
communicates with both IAUs using an RS-232 digital interface.

INDEX

APPENDICES

• GIA 63W (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communication hubs, linking all
LRUs with the on-side display. Each IAU contains a GPS SBAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, and
system integration microprocessors, and is paired with the on-side display via HSDB connection. The IAUs are
not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

• GDC 74A (1) – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air
temperature (OAT) sensor. The ADC provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed, and OAT information
to the system. It communicates with the IAUs, displays, and AHRS using an ARINC 429 digital interface.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

• GEA 71 (1) – The Engine Airframe Units receive and process signals from the engine and airframe sensors. The
unit communicates with both IAUs using an RS-485 digital interface.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• GTX 33 or GTX 33 w/ES (1) – The solid-state Transponder provides Modes A, C, and S capability (ADS-B
capability with the GTX 33 w/ES), and communicates with both IAUs through an RS-232 digital interface.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

• GRS 77 (1) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to both GDUs and both IAUs. The AHRS contains advanced sensors (including
accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the Magnetometer to obtain magnetic field information,
with the ADC to obtain air data, and with both IAUs to obtain GPS information. AHRS operation is discussed
in Section 1.4, System Operation.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

• GMU 44 (1) – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends data to the AHRS for processing to
determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the AHRS and communicates with
it via an RS-485 digital interface.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• GDL 69A (1 optional) – The Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides real-time weather information to the
G1000 MFD and PFD Inset Map, as well as digital audio entertainment. The Data Link Receiver communicates
with the MFD via a HSDB connection. A subscription to XM Satellite Radio Service is required to enable the
GDL 69A capability.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• GTS 800 (1 optional) – The GTS 800 provides real-time traffic information to the PFD (and, indirectly, to the
traffic maps on the MFD). The GTS 825 communicates with the PFD with an HSDB connection.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• GSA 80 (1) / GSA 81 (2) (only with Garmin AFCS option) – The GSA 80 servo is used for the automatic control
of pitch trim. The GSA 81 servos are used for the automatic control of pitch and roll. These units interface with
each GIA 63W.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

The GSM 86 servo gearboxes are responsible for transferring the output torque of the GSA 80/81 servo actuators
to the mechanical flight-control surface linkage.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

GDL 69A
(XM Weather/
Audio Datalink)

GTS 800
(TAS)

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

#1
GDU 1040
(PFD)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

#2
GDU 1040
(MFD)
or
GDU 1044
(MFD)

GMA 1347
(Audio
Panel)

EIS

GMA 44
(Magnetometer)

#2 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

#1 GIA 63W
(Integrated
Avionics
Unit)

GRS 77
(Attitude &
Heading)

GPS/SBAS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

GDC 74A
(Air Data
Computer)

VHF COM

VHF COM
GPS/SBAS
VOR/LOC

VOR/LOC
G/S
Flight
Director
AFCS Mode
Logic

GTX 33
(Transponder)

G/S

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

GEA 71 (Engine &
Airframe I/F)

Flight
Director
AFCS Mode
Logic
Servo Logic

Servo Logic

AFCS

GSA 80/81 (3)
(Garmin AFCS
Servos)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

KN-63
(DME)

KR-87
(ADF)

Non-Garmin Equipment

Optional
Garmin Equipment

APPENDICES

Garmin Equipment

Optional
Non-Garmin Equipment

Figure 1-1 System Block Diagram

INDEX

NOTE: For information on non-Garmin optional/additional equipment shown in Figure 1-1, consult the

applicable optional interface user’s guide. This document assumes that the reader is already familiar with
the operation of this additional equipment.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.2 SECURE DIGITAL (SD) CARDS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Ensure the G1000 System is powered off before inserting an SD card.
NOTE: Refer to Appendix B for instructions on updating the aviation database.

EIS

The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the upper right side of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for aviation database
and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.
Installing an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card in the SD card slot (the front of the card should be flush with the face of the display bezel).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) To eject the card, gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch.

AFCS

SD Card Slots

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 1-2 Display Bezel SD Card Slots

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

1.3 SYSTEM POWER-UP

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Refer to Appendix A for system-specific annunciations and alerts.
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for specific procedures concerning avionics power

application and emergency power supply operation.

EIS

The G1000 System is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical
busses. The PFD, MFD, and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features
that exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs, and outputs to provide safe operation.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-3. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within the first minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also
become momentarily illuminated on the Audio Panel and the display bezels.
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays “AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level”. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within the first minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself
both while taxiing in a straight line and during level flight.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

When the MFD powers up, the Power-up screen (Figure 1-4) displays the following information:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• System software version
• Airport Terrain database name and version
• Copyright
• Obstacle database name and expiration date
• Checklist file name
• Navigation database name and expiration date
• Basemap land database name and version
• Airport Directory name and expiration date
• SafeTaxi database name and expiration date
• FliteCharts database information or
• ChartView database information
• Terrain database name and version
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted
to continue. Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information and displays the Auxiliary (AUX) Weight
Planning Page. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to determine a position, the
aircraft’s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 1-3 PFD Initialization

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Figure 1-4 Example MFD Power-up Screen

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.4 SYSTEM OPERATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus for high-speed communication. As shown in
Figure 1-1, each IAU is connected to the on-side display. This section discusses normal and reversionary G1000
display operation, AHRS modes, GPS receiver operation, and G1000 System Annunciations.

DISPLAY OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD (see Section 1.7). In

EIS

reversionary mode, it can be adjusted from the remaining display(s).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(see the EIS Section). Both displays offer control for COM and NAV frequency selection.

AFCS

Figure 1-5 System Normal Operation

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

In the event of an MFD failure, the system automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
reversionary mode, all important flight information is presented on the remaining display in the same format
as in normal operating mode.
• PFD failure – MFD remains in normal mode.
• MFD failure – PFD automatically switches to reversionary mode.

APPENDICES

Reversionary mode may be manually activated on all displays by pressing the Audio Panel’s red DISPLAY
BACKUP Button. Pressing this button again deactivates reversionary mode.

INDEX

If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

NAV1 and COM1 Flagged Invalid (provided by the failed PFD)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

DISPLAY BACKUP Button
Manually Activates/Deactivates Reversionary Mode on All Displays
Figure 1-6 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS

GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing
failed data (Figure 1-7 displays many possible flags and responsible LRUs). Upon G1000 power-up, certain
instruments remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All instruments should be operational within one
minute of power-up. If any instrument remains flagged, the G1000 should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized
repair facility.
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer

AFCS

GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
or
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Unit

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

GRS 77 AHRS
or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
GDU Software or
Database Mismatch

GDC 74A Air
Data Computer

Figure 1-7 G1000 System Failure Annunciations

APPENDICES

GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units

GTX 33 Transponder
or
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

SYSTEM STATUS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The System Status Page displays the statuses, serial numbers, and software version numbers for all detected
system LRUs. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks; failed, by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted
and a service center or Garmin-authorized dealer informed.
The LRU and ARFRM Softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU INFO or AIRFRAME
window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected) places
the cursor in the DATABASE window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the DATABASE window. Pressing the softkey a third time will change the softkey label to PFD2
DB (only if three tube system, otherwise will go to MFD1 DB again). PFD 2 database information is now
displayed in the DATABASE window.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The ANN TEST Softkey, when pressed, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.

Figure 1-8 Example System Status Page

INDEX

Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed on this page. Refer to the Appendices and
Additional Features sections for more information about databases.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Viewing database information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘Database’ Box,

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

a) Press the DB Softkey (repeat until desired database is shown; MFD1, PFD1, or PFD2).
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Select Dbase Window’ and press the ENT Key.

EIS

3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view database status information.

The G1000 uses aural tones to convey the priority of airframe-specific alerts. The alerting system’s annunciation
tone may be tested from the System Status Page. Refer to the Appendices for airframe-specific alerts.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Press the ANN TEST Softkey.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

AHRS OPERATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering while AHRS is not operating normally may degrade AHRS accuracy.

EIS

In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77 AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air
data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic
field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air
data information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available (see Figure 1-9)
and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor
inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.

Mag Data AND Air Data
Available and Reliable?

YES

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Mag Data Available and Reliable?

GPS Data Available and Reliable?

YES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The AHRS (GRS 77) corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic
Field Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field and
its annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every five years. See the Appendices for
information on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt you on startup when
an update is available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being
displayed to the pilot.

AHRS no-Mag
Mode

AHRS no-Mag/
no-Air Mode

Heading Invalid

AHRS no-GPS
Mode

AHRS coast-on-gyros
until invalid

AFCS
APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AHRS Normal
Mode

YES

Air Data Available and Reliable?

Attitude/Heading Invalid

INDEX

Figure 1-9 AHRS Operation

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts. Any
failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results in loss of attitude and heading information (indicated by red
‘X’ flags over the corresponding flight instruments).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses
the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD(s) as long as magnetometer and airspeed
data are available and valid.
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information; however, the
heading output on the PFD(s) is flagged as invalid with a red ‘X’.

EIS

Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information.
Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and heading information.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

GPS RECEIVER OPERATION

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Each Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Internal system checking is performed to
ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFD(s). When both GPS receivers are providing
accurate data, the GPS receiver producing the better solution is used by the system. Information collected by
the specified receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status
Page.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Use the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.6 for information on
navigating MFD page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select GPS Status Page (third page in the AUX Page Group).
3) To change the selected GPS receiver:

Press the desired GPS Softkey.

AFCS

Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Satellite Signal
Information

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Satellite Constellation
Diagram

GPS
Receiver
Status

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

RAIM
Availability
Prediction

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Satellite
Signal
Strength
Bars

Figure 1-10 GPS Status Page

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has acquired
satellites before the other or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS signal. While the aircraft
is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty
acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers
temporarily losing the SBAS signal. If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the
information for GPS1 and GPS2. Discrepancies may indicate a problem.

GPS RECEIVER STATUS

APPENDICES

The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is
in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.

INDEX

When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS)
status should be indicated as INACTIVE at this point. When acquisition is complete, the solution status
changes to 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS becomes active.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the SBAS coverage area, it may
be desirable to disable SBAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in the GPS
Status box indicates DISABLED.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is pressed)(WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS capable systems only)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS
coverage area, it may be desirable to disable the reception of the applicable SBAS signal (although it is not
recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in the GPS Status box indicates DISABLED. There may be a
small delay for the GPS Status box to be updated upon WAAS, EGNOS, and MSAS enabling/disabling.
Disabling SBAS

EIS

1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, select the SBAS Softkey.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired SBAS system.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 1-11 Enable/Disable SBAS

AFCS

RAIM PREDICTION

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.

APPENDICES

The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time. In most cases
performing RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach may be outside
the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended approach.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
G1000 automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active”. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the missed approach
procedure must be flown.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Predicting RAIM availability:
1) Select the GPS Status Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
5) Enter the desired waypoint:

EIS

a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key. Refer
to Section 1.7 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the G1000.
Or:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

a) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
b) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints, if required.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

c) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint. The G1000 automatically fills in the identifier,
facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
d) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
6) Enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

8) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:

• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination

• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress

• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date

AFCS

• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date

Predicting RAIM availability at present position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.

APPENDICES

4) Press the MENU Key.
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
INDEX

9) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination

• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress

• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date

SATELLITE INFORMATION

EIS

Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a satellite constellation diagram.
This sky view is always oriented north-up, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle
representing 45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead. Each satellite
is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite identification
number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Cyan bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).

AFCS

Using the current satellite signal information, they system calculates the aircraft’s GPS position, time,
altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft (displayed below the satellite signal accuracy measurements
for reference). The following quantities denote the accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix:
• Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU)—A statistical error indication; the radius of a circle centered on an
estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of lying

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Horizontal Dilution of Precision (HDOP)—Measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites
received and where they are relative to each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting
better accuracy

APPENDICES

• Horizontal and Vertical Figures of Merit (HFOM and VFOM)—Measures of horizontal and vertical position
uncertainty; the current 95% confidence horizontal and vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS
receiver

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.5 G1000 CONTROLS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G1000 controls have been designed to simplify operation of the system and minimize workload and
the time required to access sophisticated functionality. Controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels and
the Audio Panel. PFD and MFD controls and softkeys are discussed in this section. Audio Panel controls are
described in the Audio Panel and CNS section; see the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information about
NAV/COM controls.

PFD/MFD CONTROLS
2

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

INDEX

Figure 1-12 PFD/MFD Controls

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

3
4

CLR Key
(DFLT MAP)

MENU Key

PROC Key

ENT Key

Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus
Press and hold to display the MFD Navigation Map Page (MFD only).
Displays a context-sensitive list of options for accessing additional features or making
setting changes
Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs), and
approach procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan or selected airport
Validates/confirms menu selection or data entry

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

NAV VOL/ID Knob Turn to control NAV audio volume (shown in the NAV Frequency Box as a
percentage)
Press to toggle Morse code identifier audio ON/OFF
Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies
NAV Frequency
Transfer Key
Turn to tune NAV receiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for kHz)
NAV Knob
Press to toggle light blue tuning box between NAV1 and NAV2
Turn to manually select a heading
Heading Knob
Press to display a digital heading momentarily to the left of the HSI and synchronize
the Selected Heading to the and current heading
Turn to change map range
Joystick
Press to activate Map Pointer for map panning
Turn large knob for altimeter barometric pressure setting
CRS/BARO Knob
Turn small knob to adjust course (only when HSI is in VOR or OBS Mode)
Press to re-center the CDI and return course pointer directly TO bearing of active
waypoint/station
Turn to tune COM transceiver standby frequencies (large knob for MHz; small for
COM Knob
kHz)
Press to toggle cyan tuning box between COM1 and COM2
The selected COM (green) is controlled with the COM MIC Key (Audio Panel).
Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies
COM Frequency
Transfer Key
Press and hold 2 seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically
(EMERG)
into the active frequency field
COM VOL/SQ Knob Turn to control COM audio volume level (shown as a percentage in the COM
Frequency Box)
Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON/OFF
Direct-to Key ( ) Activates the direct-to function and allows the user to enter a destination waypoint
and establish a direct course to the selected destination (specified by identifier,
chosen from the active route)
Displays flight plan information
FPL Key

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
16

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Press to turn the selection cursor ON/OFF.
(Flight Management Data Entry: With cursor ON, turn to enter data in the highlighted field (large
knob moves cursor location; small knob selects character for highlighted cursor
System Knob)
location)
Scrolling: When a list of information is too long for the window/box, a scroll bar
appears, indicating more items to view. With cursor ON, turn large knob to scroll
through the list.
Page Selection: Turn knob on MFD to select the page to view (large knob selects a
page group; small knob selects a specific page from the group)
17 Softkey Selection
Press to select softkey shown above the bezel key on the PFD/MFD display
Keys
18 ALT Knob
Sets the Selected Altitude, shown above the Altimeter (the large knob selects the
thousands, the small knob selects the hundreds)
FMS Knob

ADDITIONAL MFD CONTROLS (GARMIN AFCS INSTALLED)
GDU 1044

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1
2

AFCS

Figure 1-13 MFD Controls (Garmin AFCS Only)

The following are only available with the GFC 700 AFCS.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1 AP Key

3 NAV Key

Engages/disengages the autopilot and flight director. Pressing the AP Key activates
the flight director and engages the autopilot in the default pitch axis and roll axis
modes. Pressing the AP Key again disengages the autopilot and deactivates the flight
director.
Activates/deactivates the flight director only. Pressing the FD Key turns on the flight
director in the default pitch axis and roll axis modes. Pressing the FD Key again
deactivates the flight director and removes the command bars, unless the autopilot
is engaged. If the autopilot is engaged, the FD Key is disabled.
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode.

4 ALT Key

Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode.

INDEX

APPENDICES

2 FD Key

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode.

6 FLC Key

Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode.

7 HDG Key

Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode.

8 APR Key

Selects/deselects Approach Mode.

9 VNV Key

Selects/deselects Vertical Navigation Mode.

10 NOSE UP Key

Controls the active pitch reference for the Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight
Level Change modes.

EIS

11 NOSE DN Key

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

5 VS Key

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The NAV, CRS/BARO, COM, FMS, and ALT knobs are concentric dual knobs, each having small (inner) and
large (outer) control portion. When a portion of the knob is not specified in the text, either may be used.

Large (Outer) Knob
Small (Inner) Knob

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 1-14 Dual Concentric Knob

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

SOFTKEY FUNCTION

AFCS

The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is pressed, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background. When a softkey function is disabled, the softkey
label is subdued (dimmed).
Softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity.
Softkey Selection Box
(using Control Unit)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Softkey
On

Softkey
Names
(Displayed)

Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)
Figure 1-15 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)

APPENDICES

PFD SOFTKEYS
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and MSG softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on gray
background when selected, and automatically switch back to white text on black background.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be pressed to return to the
previous level. The MSG Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
(optional)
INSET

PFD

OBS

CDI

ADF/DME

XPDR

IDENT

TMR/REF

NRST

MSG

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)

Figure 1-16 Top Level PFD Softkeys

INSET

EIS

INSET
OFF

DCLTR (3)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

OFF

DCLTR

WX LGND

DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2

TRFC-2

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

WX LGND
DCLTR-3
TRAFFIC

TOPO
INSET

TERRAIN
WIND
DFLTS
SYN
VIS
NEXRAD

XM LTNG
METAR

(optional)

AFCS

Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
Selects desired amount of map detail;
cycles(optional)
through declutter
levels:
(optional)
(optional)
NEXRAD XM LTNG METAR
MSG
TOPO
TERRAIN
BACK

DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible

DCLTR-1: Declutters land data

DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA dataPress the BACK Softkey to return
TRFC-1
theactive
top-level

DCLTR-3: Removes everything except fortothe
flightsoftkeys.
plan
Displays icon and age on the Inset Map for the selected weather products
Displays traffic information on Inset Map

TRAFFIC: No Traffic displayed on Inset Map
PFD
TRFC-1: Traffic displayed on Inset Map

TRFC-2: Traffic Only display shown
Displays topographical data(optional)
(e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and elevation scale
OBS
CDI
IDENT TMR/REF
NRST
MSG
ADF/DME XPDR
onPFD
Inset Map
Displays terrain information on Inset Map
(optional)
DME Displays
BRG
2 and
HSI FMT
MSG
STD BARO
BACK
BRG1XM NEXRAD
ALT
Press
the
CDI
Softkey
to cycle
through
weather
coverage
on UNIT
Inset
Map
(optional)
navigation sources:
Displays XM lightning information
on Inset Map (optional)
- GPS
- NAV1
(VOR/LOC)
Press
the on
BRG1/BRG2
Press the BACK Softkey to return
Displays METAR information
Inset Map (optional)
- NAV2
softkeys
to (VOR/LOC)
display/remove to the top-level softkeys.
the Bearing Information
windows and cycle through
bearing sources:
- NAV1/NAV2
- GPS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

INSET

360 HSI

APPENDICES

OFF

DCLTR

WX LGND

TOPO

ARC HSI

(optional) (optional) (optional)
NEXRAD XM LTNG

TERRAIN

METERS
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2
OPTN1

TRFC-1

OPTN2

TRFC-2
OPTN3

HPA

METAR

BACK
BACK

MSG
MSG

BACK

MSG

BACK

MSG

Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.

OFF

INDEX

DCLTR-3

PATHWAY

SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS PFD

Figure 1-17 INSET Softkeys

MSG

XPDR

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

22
(optional)

(optional)

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

APPENDICES

IN
HPA

STD BARO

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

METERS

AFCS

ALT UNIT

Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through:

NAV1: Waypoint frequency/identifier and distance information

GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information

OFF: Removes window
Displays softkeys to select the HSI format
Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc (Bearing Information windows unavailable)
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through:

NAV2: Waypoint frequency/identifier and distance information

GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information

OFF: Removes window
Displays softkeys for changing the Altimeter barometric setting and altitude displays
to metric units
Displays the current and Selected altitudes in meters in addition to feet, when
selected
Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in inches of mercury (in Hg)
Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in hectopascals (hPa)
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric display is selected)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

HSI FRMT
360 HSI
ARC HSI
BRG2

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

BRG1

EIS

DFLTS
WIND
OPTN1
OPTN2
OPTN3
OFF
DME

Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configuration
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision features
Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the
active flight plan
Enables synthetic terrain depiction
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the current
aircraft position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is within
approximately 9 nm.
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
Displays softkeys to select and configure wind data
Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
Wind direction arrow with numeric speed
Wind direction arrow with numeric headwind/tailwind and crosswind speed
Removes wind information from display
Displays/removes the DME Information Window (optional)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYN TERR
HRZN HDG
APTSIGNS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PFD

SYN VIS
PATHWAY

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

DCLTR-1

TRFC-1

DCLTR-2

TRFC-2

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

DCLTR-3

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

PFD

(optional)

(optional)
SYN VIS

DFLTS

WIND

DME

BRG1

HSI FMT

BRG2

ALT UNIT STD BARO

BACK

MSG

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Press the BRG1/BRG2
Press the BACK Softkey to return
softkeys to display/remove to the top-level softkeys.
the Bearing Information
windows and cycle through
bearing sources:
- NAV1/NAV2
- GPS
360 HSI

ARC HSI

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

METERS

OPTN1

OPTN2

OPTN3

HPA

OFF

BACK

MSG

BACK

MSG

BACK

MSG

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS

MSG

AFCS

Figure 1-18 PFD ConfigurationXPDR
Softkeys

STBY

ALT

GND

VFR

CODE

IDENT

ADS-B TX

BACK

MSG

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.

IDENT

BKSP

BACK

MSG

INDEX

APPENDICES

Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

DCLTR-1

TRFC-1

DCLTR-2

TRFC-2

XPDR
(optional)
STBY
SYN VIS
ON
ALT

WIND

DFLTS

SYN TERR HRZN HDG

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

TMR/REF
NRST
PATHWAY
MSG

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

OPTN1

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

VFR
CODE

0—7
BKSP

ADS-B TX
IDENT

EIS

GND

Selects OBS Mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active
leg)
PFD
Cycles through GPS, VOR1, and VOR2 navigation sources on the HSI
Displays the ADF/DME Tuning Window, allowing tuning and selection of the ADF and
the DME (optional)
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys:
(optional)
SelectsBRG
standby
mode (Transponder
does ALT
notUNIT
replySTD
to any
interrogations)
DME
BRG2
HSI FMT
MSG
BARO
BACK
1
Selects Mode A (Transponder replies to interrogations)
Selects Mode C – altitude
mode (Transponder
repliesSoftkey
to identification
Press thereporting
BRG1/BRG2
Press the BACK
to return and
softkeys to display/remove to the top-level softkeys.
altitude interrogations)
the Bearing Information
Manually selects Ground
Mode
(Transponder
windows
and cycle
through does not allow Mode A and Mode C
bearing
sources: squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode
replies, but does permit
acquisition
- NAV1/NAV2
S interrogations)
- GPS
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in U.S.A. only)
360 HSI ARC HSI
BACK
MSG
Displays transponder
code selection softkeys 0-7
Use numbers to enter code
Removes numbers
entered, one at IN
a time HPA
METERS
BACK
MSG
Enables/disables automatic transmission of ADS-B position and speed.
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
transponder
BACK
MSG
OPTN2
OPTN3 return
OFF on the ATC screen
Displays/removes Timer/References Window
Displays/removes Nearest Airports Window
MSG
APTSIGNS
Displays/removes Messages Window

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

CDI
ADF/DME

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

DCLTR-3

OBS

Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.

XPDR

AFCS

STBY

ALT

GND

VFR

CODE

IDENT

ADS-B TX

BACK

MSG

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.

IDENT

BKSP

BACK

MSG

APPENDICES

Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.

Figure 1-19 XPDR Softkeys

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

MFD softkeys vary depending on the page selected. EIS, Navigation Map Page (default MFD page), and
Checklist Page softkeys are described here.
ENGINE

DCLTR SHW CHRT

MAP

DCLTR

EIS

DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

DCLTR-3

(optional) (optional) (optional) (optional)
TRAFFIC

PROFILE

TOPO

TERRAIN

AIRWAYS

NEXRAD

XM LTNG

METAR

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AIRWAYS

LEGEND

BACK

Press the BACK softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.

AIRWY ON
AIRWY LO

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

AIRWY HI

ENGINE

DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL

AFCS

Press the ENGINE softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 1-20 MFD Softkeys (Engine and Navigation Map Page)

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

DEC FUEL
INC FUEL
RST FUEL

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

SHW CHRT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

NEXRAD

XM LTNG
METAR
LEGEND
BACK
DCLTR (3)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

TERRAIN
AIRWAYS

EIS

MAP
TRAFFIC
PROFILE
TOPO

Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; select again to exit
page (see the EIS Section for more information)
Decreases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum fuel capacity for aircraft and fuel used
to zero
Enables second-level Navigation Map Page softkeys
Displays/removes traffic information on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes profile view on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on
Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes terrain information on Navigation Map Page
Selects the desired display of Airways; cycles through:

AIRWY ON: All Airways displayed

AIRWY LO: Low Altitude (Victor) Airways displayed

AIRWY HI: High Altitude Airways (Jetways) displayed

AIRWAYS: Airways are not displayed
Displays/removes NEXRAD weather/coverage on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Displays/removes XM lightning information on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Displays/removes Graphical METARs on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Displays/removes METAR legend on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Returns to top-level softkeys
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:

DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible

DCLTR-1: Removes land data

DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data

DCLTR-3: Removes everything except the active flight plan

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENGINE

When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

1.6 ACCESSING G1000 FUNCTIONALITY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

MENUS

EIS

The G1000 has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to
the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘NO OPTIONS’
when there are no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all
window/page group operations are described in Section 1.5, G1000 Controls.
Navigating a menu:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the
window/box when the option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Press the CLR Key or FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
Options for FPL Window

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

No Options for
NRST Window

Figure 1-21 Page Menu Examples
AFCS

DATA ENTRY

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Alphanumeric data (e.g., Flight ID, waypoint identifiers, barometric minimum descent altitude) are directly
entered into the G1000 using the FMS Knob corresponding to the display (PFD or MFD).

INDEX

APPENDICES

In some instances, such as when entering an identifier, the G1000 tries to predict the desired identifier based
on the characters being entered. In this case, if the desired identifier appears, use the ENT Key to confirm the
entry without entering the rest of the identifier manually. This can save the pilot from entering all the characters
of the identifier.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Besides character-by-character data entry, the system also provides a shortcut for entering waypoint identifiers.
When the cursor is on a field awaiting entry of a waypoint identifier, turning the small FMS Knob counterclockwise accesses five different lists of waypoint identifiers for quick selection: flight plan (FPL), nearest
(NRST), recently-entered (RECENT), user (USER), and airway (AIRWAY)(AIRWAY available when active leg is
part of an airway). The G1000 automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the information
for the selected waypoint.
Using the FMS Knob to enter data:
1) If needed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

EIS

2) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field.
3) Begin entering data.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

a) To quickly enter a waypoint identifier, turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of waypoints
in the active flight plan (list is titled FPL). If desired, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to scroll through lists
of nearest waypoints (NRST) and recently-entered waypoints (RECENT).
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

a) Turn the small FMS Knob to select a character for the first placeholder.

Turning the knob clockwise scrolls through the alphabet (where appropriate) toward the letter Z, starting at
K, and the digits zero through nine. Afterwards, turning the knob counter-clockwise scrolls in the opposite
direction.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

b) Use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next placeholder in the field.
c) Repeat, using the small FMS Knob to select a character and the large FMS Knob to move the cursor, until the
field is complete.
d) Press the ENT Key to confirm entry.

AFCS

7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to cancel data entry (the field reverts back to its previous information).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PAGE GROUPS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. In the bottom right
corner of the screen, a page group window is displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs are
displayed along the bottom of the window. The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs.
The current page group and current page within the group are shown in light blue. For some of these pages
(Airport/Procedures/Weather Information, XM, Procedure Loading), the active title of the page changes while
the page name in the list remains the same.

EIS

NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.

Page Group

Active Page Title

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

MFD

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pages in
Current
Group

Page Groups
Figure 1-22 Page Title and Page Groups

AFCS

The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected

INDEX

APPENDICES

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.There are also several pages
(Airport Information and XM Information pages) which are selected first from within a main page group with
the FMS Knobs, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page. In this case, the page remains set
to the selected screen until a different screen softkey is pressed.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

• Map Page Group (MAP)
Navigation Map
Traffic Map (TAS optional)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Weather Data Link (optional)
Terrain (Terrain SVS (optional)/
TAWS (optional))

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 1-23 Map Pages

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Waypoint Page Group (WPT)
Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
- Airport Information
(INFO-1 Softkey)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Airport Directory Information
(INFO-2 Softkey)
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)

AFCS

- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

- Weather Information (optional)
(WX Softkey)
Intersection Information
NDB Information
VOR Information

APPENDICES

Airport/Procedures/
Weather Information
Pages

User Waypoint Information
Figure 1-24 Waypoint Pages

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• Auxiliary Page Group (AUX)
Weight Planning

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Trip Planning
Utility
GPS Status
System Setup 1
System Setup 2 (optional w/ESP)
EIS

XM Satellite pages (optional)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- XM Information
(INFO Softkey)

XM Pages
System Setup
Pages

- XM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
System Status

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 1-25 Auxiliary Pages

Maintenance data is continuously recorded by the Central Maintenance Computer (CMC). At the discretion
of the Aircraft Manufacturer, this data may be displayed on an OEM DIAGNOSTICS Page accessible from within
the AUX Page Group.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Nearest Page Group (NRST)
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB

AFCS

Nearest VOR
Nearest User Waypoints
Nearest Frequencies

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Nearest Airspaces

INDEX

Figure 1-26 Nearest Pages

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knob, there are pages for flight
planning (FPL) and loading procedures (PROC) which are accessed by key. In some instances, softkeys may be
used to access the Procedure Loading pages.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Flight Plan pages are accessed using the FPL Key on the MFD. Main pages within this group are selected
by turning the small FMS Knob.
• Flight Plan Page Group (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
Flight Plan Catalog

EIS

- Stored Flight Plan
(NEW Softkey)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 1-27 Flight Plan Pages

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Procedure Loading pages may be accessed at any time on the MFD by pressing the PROC Key. A menu
is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading page is
opened. These pages can also be accessed from the Active and Stored Flight Plan pages using the LD softkeys.
Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure Loading pages (note the single page icon in the
lower right corner).
• Procedure Loading Page Group (PROC)

AFCS

Departure Loading
Arrival Loading
Approach Loading

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 1-28 Procedure Loading Pages
INDEX

Information on optional electronic checklist pages is offered later in this section. Checklist pages may be
accessed from any page on the MFD using the CHKLIST Softkey.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

SYSTEM SETTINGS
The System Setup 1 Page allows management of the following system parameters:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• Date/time
• Displayed navigation angle reference, temperature,
and position settings
• Baro transition alert
(see Flight Instruments Section)

• CDI scaling for GPS navigation source
(see the Flight Instruments Section)
• COM channel spacing
(see the Audio Panel and CNS Section)

• Airspace alerts
(see the Flight Management Section)

EIS

• MFD Navigation Status Box fields
(see the Flight Management Section)

• Criteria for displaying nearest airports
(see the Flight Management Section)

• Arrival alerts

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Audio alerts

APPENDICES

Figure 1-29 System Setup 1 Page

Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.

INDEX

2) Press the DFLTS Softkey.
Or:

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

PILOT PROFILES

EIS

System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected
pilot profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Screen (Figure 1-4). The G1000 can store up to 25 profiles;
the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at
the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be created,
selected, renamed, or deleted.
Creating a profile:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.

5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.

8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
Or:

AFCS

Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.

Selecting an active profile:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.

APPENDICES

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The G1000 loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Renaming a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.

5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.

EIS

7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

Deleting a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.

5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

6) Press the ENT Key.

7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

AFCS

If an SD card is inserted into the top slot of the MFD, pilot profiles may imported from the SD card into the
system, or exported from the system to the SD card.
Because system settings may vary from one airframe to another, always verify system settings from an
imported profile are consistent with the desired settings.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Importing a profile from an SD card:
1) Insert an SD card containing the pilot profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
3) Select the IMPORT Softkey.

APPENDICES

Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

4) The system displays the Pilot Profile Importing window with ‘IMPORT’ highlighted. To change the selected
profile to be imported from the SD card (shown as ‘SELECT FILE’), turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
profile file name, then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight a profile from the list, and press the ENT Key.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5) If desired, the profile name to be used after profile has been imported can be changed by turning the FMS
Knob to highlight the ‘PROFILE NAME’ field, then use the large and small FMS Knobs to enter the name, and
press the ENT Key. Imported profile names cannot begin with a blank space or be named ‘DEFAULT’, ‘GARMIN
DEFAULTS’ or ‘DEFAULT SETTINGS’.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

6) With ‘IMPORT’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
7) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
Pilot Profile Importing window.

EIS

8) If successful, the system displays ‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’ in the IMPORT RESULTS window below. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page.
The imported profile becomes the active profile.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pilot Profiles Available for Import from
SD Card (‘STEVE’S PROFILE’ Selected)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pilot Profile Importing and Import
Results Window

Import Successful

AFCS

Figure 1-30 Pilot Profile Import (AUX - System Setup Page)

Exporting a profile to an SD card:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Insert the SD card for storing the Pilot Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
3) If necessary, activate the desired pilot profile to export. Only the currently active Pilot Profile can be exported.
4) Select the EXPORT Softkey. The system displays the Pilot Profile Exporting window.

APPENDICES

Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

5) To export the pilot profile using the current supplied name, press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’ highlighted. To
change the profile file name turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘SELECT FILE’ field, then enter the new
name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’
highlighted.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

6) If the profile name to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system displays
an ‘Overwrite existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on the SD card
with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to
the Pilot Profile Exporting window without exporting the profile.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

7) If successful, the EXPORT RESULTS window displays ‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pilot Profile Exporting Window, Enter a
Name to Use for Exported Profile

Export Successful

Figure 1-31 Pilot Profile Export on the AUX - System Setup Page

DATE/TIME

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The system time is displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Time and date format (local 12-hr,
local 24-hr, or UTC) are modified on the System Setup Page. Universal Coordinated Time (UTC; also called
Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) or Zulu) date and time are calculated directly from the GPS satellites signals
and cannot be changed. An offset is provided to add or subtract the desired amount of time (hours:minutes)
from UTC to define current local time.

AFCS

Configuring the system time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The ‘Time
Offset’ field is highlighted (for local time formats).

INDEX

APPENDICES

5) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm selection.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

DISPLAY UNITS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the G1000 screens can be changed on the System Setup
Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Changing a display units setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Display Units’ box.

Temperature

Celsius*
Fahrenheit
Gallons*

All temperatures on PFD(s)
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)

Pounds*
N/A
HDDD°MM.MM’* All positions
HDDD°MM’SS.S”

Engine Indication System (EIS)
N/A
N/A

APPENDICES

Fuel and
Fuel Flow
Weight
Position

Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Feet*
Meters

AFCS

Altitude and
Vertical Speed

Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Metric
Nautical*

Exceptions

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Distance and
Speed

Affected Quantities
Heading
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
Arrival Alert trigger distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
All altitudes on MFD
All elevations on MFD

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Category
Settings
Navigation Angle Magnetic*
True

EIS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select from a list of measurement units and press the ENT Key when the desired
unit is highlighted.

* Default setting
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (System Status Page)

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
AIRSPACE ALERTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Airspace Alert feature provides a message alert when the aircraft is approaching or near a controlled or
special-use airspace. The altitude buffer setting increases the range above or below an airspace for which an
alert is generated; the default value is 200 feet. Alerts for the following airspaces can be turned on/off from
the System Setup Page:
• Class B/TMA

• Class D

• MOA (Military)

• Class C/TCA

• Restricted

• Other airspaces

EIS

Turning Airspace Alerts off does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace
boundaries depicted on the Navigation Map Page.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the ‘Airspace Alerts’ Box.
4) Enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.

ARRIVAL ALERTS

AFCS

Arrival alerts provide notification upon reaching a specified distance from the final destination (the direct-to
waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan). Once this trigger distance (up to 99.9 units) has been reached,
the Navigation Status Box on the PFD(s) display(s) an “Arrival at [waypoint]” message.
Enabling/disabling arrival alerting and changing the trigger distance:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ON/OFF field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.

APPENDICES

4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the ‘Arrival Alert’ Box.
6) Enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.

AUDIO ALERTS
INDEX

The gender of the voice used to announce voice alerts is shown on the System Setup 1 Page. See the
Appendices for voice alerts.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

MFD DATA BAR FIELDS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

By default, the Navigation Status Box on the MFD is set to display ground speed (GS), distance to next
waypoint (DIS), estimated time enroute (ETE), and enroute safe altitude (ESA). These four data fields can be
changed to display the following information:
• Bearing (BRG)
• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Endurance (END)

EIS

• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Fuel on Board (FOB)
• Fuel over Destination (FOD)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Ground Speed (GS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
• Track Angle Error (TKE)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Track (TRK)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
The Navigation Status Box on the PFD(s) is not affected by these changes; flight plan, distance, and bearing
information are displayed at all times.

AFCS

Changing the information shown in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection from the data options list and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 1-32 Navigation Status Box (MFD)

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GPS CDI

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to define the scale for the Course Deviation
Indicator (CDI) when GPS is the selected navigation source and also displays the current system value for the
CDI scale. The range values represent full scale deflection for the CDI to either side. The default setting is
‘Auto’ (refer to the CDI description in the Flight Instruments Section for information on CDI scaling).
If a lower CDI scale setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher scale settings are not selected during
any phase of flight. Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow
the selected CDI scale and corresponding flight phase.

EIS

Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Selected’ in the ‘GPS CDI’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting (2 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm, Auto) and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

COM CONFIGURATION
The COM Configuration Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to select 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz
COM frequency channel spacing.
Changing COM channel spacing:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the channel spacing field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired spacing and press the ENT Key.

AFCS

NEAREST AIRPORTS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the nine nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not of appropriate surface from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“any” for runway surface type.
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria (any, hard only, hard/soft, water):

APPENDICES

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.

INDEX

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (any, hard only, hard/soft, water) and press the
ENT Key.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
4) Enter the minimum runway length (zero to 99,999 feet) and press the ENT Key.

SYSTEM UTILITIES

EIS

For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX - Utility
Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of the
time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds—are
displayed from the time of the last reset. A scheduler feature is also provided so the pilot can enter reminder
messages to be displayed at specified intervals in the Alerts Window on the PFD(s) (see Figure 1-33).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 1-33 Utility Page

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TIMERS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero
on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are
zeroed.
Setting the generic timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.

EIS

2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a desired starting time is desired:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

AFCS

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.

APPENDICES

3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

The G1000 records the time at which departure occurs, measured from system power-up or aircraft lift off.
The displayed departure time can also be reset to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in
which the time is displayed is controlled from the System Setup 1 Page.
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:

INDEX

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.

Resetting the departure time:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.

TRIP STATISTICS
EIS

The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Resetting trip statistics readouts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer

• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only

• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are reset
to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.

SCHEDULER

AFCS

The scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., “Change oil”, “Switch
fuel tanks”, “Overhaul”). Messages can be set to display based on a specific date and time (event), once the
message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches
zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset to the original timer value once
the message is displayed. When power is cycled, messages are retained until deleted, and message timer
countdown is restarted.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Entering a scheduler message:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.

APPENDICES

2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Alerts Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to ‘Type’.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select set the message alert type:

• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)

• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.

EIS

9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.

Deleting a scheduler message:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Scheduler messages appear in the Alerts Window on the PFD(s) and cause the ALERTS Softkey label
to change to ‘ADVISORY’. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Alerts Window and acknowledges
the scheduler message. The softkey reverts to the ‘ALERTS’ label and when pressed, the Alerts Window is
removed from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message list.

PFD

INDEX

Figure 1-34 PFD Alerts Window

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

1.7 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Backlighting of the PFD, MFD and Audio Panel keys can be adjusted automatically or manually. The automatic
setting (default) uses photocells to adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are preconfigured to optimize display appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. In normal
display mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it can be adjusted from
the remaining display(s).
Adjusting display backlighting manually:

EIS

1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’. No
other window can be displayed on the PFD while the PFD Setup Menu is displayed. Pressing the MENU Key
while any other PFD window is displayed does not display the PFD Setup Menu.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.

4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2-4.
5) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Adjusting key backlighting manually:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.

4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’ and press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.

AFCS

7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’.
8) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ and repeat steps 4-7.
9) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

PFD
Figure 1-35 PFD Setup Menu

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM OVERVIEW

Blank Page

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

WARNING: If the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the backup

instruments.
NOTE: The Garmin Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on

selected flight instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear
on the display during certain AFCS flight director modes.
EIS

The PFD features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and course deviation information.
In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic, and weather information are also
presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing

• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
– Turn Rate Indicator

– True airspeed

– Bearing pointers and information windows

– Airspeed awareness ranges

– Navigation source

– Vspeed reference flags

– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
– Bearing pointers and information windows

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

– Indicated airspeed

• Transponder Mode, Code, and Ident/Reply

• Altimeter, showing
– Trend vector

• Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)

– Barometric setting

• References Window, showing
– Generic timer

– Reference altitude

• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
• Outside air temperature (OAT)

– Vspeed values
– Barometric or temperature compensated
minimum descent altitude (MDA) or decision
height (DH)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications

AFCS

• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators

• Wind data

• ISA temperature deviation

APPENDICES

The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

18
17
16

2
EIS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

14
3

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

8
1

NAV Frequency Box

Turn Rate Indicator

Airspeed Indicator

Barometric Altimeter Setting

True Airspeed

Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)

Current Heading

Reference Altitude Bug

Horizontal Situation Indicator ( HSI)

Altimeter

ISA Temperature Deviation

Reference Altitude

Outside Air Temperature (OAT)

COM Frequency Box

Softkeys

Navigation Status Box

System Time

Slip/Skid Indicator

Transponder Data Box

Attitude Indicator

Heading Bug

INDEX

Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

13
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

12
1

11
EIS

10
2

9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

6
8

CAS Window

Selected Heading

Selected Course

Wind Data Box

Inset Map

Required Vertical Speed
Indicator
11 Vertical Deviation Indication

Bearing Information Windows

VNV Target Altitude

Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height
Flight Plan Window

Terrain Annunciation

AFCS Status Annunciation

AFCS

Traffic Annunciation

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for airspeed criteria and Vspeed values.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The true airspeed is
displayed in knots below the Airspeed Indicator. The numeric labels and major tick marks on the moving
tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving tape are shown at intervals of
five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 60 knots of airspeed viewable at any time. The indicated
airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until reaching never exceed speed
(VNE), at which point it turns red.
Airspeed
Trend
Vector

VYSE
Blue Line

Indicated
Airspeed

Vspeed
References

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Speed
Ranges

VMCA
Red Line

Red
Pointer
at VNE
Low
Speed
Range

True
Airspeed

AFCS

Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator Ranges

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

A color-coded (red, white, green, yellow”) speed range strip is located on the moving tape. The colors denote
flaps operating range, normal operating range, caution range, and never-exceed speed (VNE). A red range is also
present for low speed awareness.

INDEX

APPENDICES

The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VNE,
the number in the indicated airspeed pointer changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains
constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

VSpeeds (VX and VY) cannot be changed, however the speed flags can be turned on/off from the Timer/
References Window. When active (on), the speed flags are displayed at their respective locations to the right
of the airspeed scale.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Turning Vspeed flags on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ‘ON’ or counterclockwise to ‘OFF’.
4) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Timer/References Menu

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Timer/References Window

Figure 2-4 Timer/References Window and Menu

Vspeed flags can be turned on or off all at once.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Modifying Vspeeds (on, off):
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection.

AFCS

4) Press the ENT Key.
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

ATTITUDE INDICATOR

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
8

EIS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4
5

Roll Pointer

Roll Scale

Horizon Line

Aircraft Symbol

Land Representation

Pitch Scale

Slip/Skid Indicator

Sky Representation

Roll Scale Zero

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 2-5 Attitude Indicator

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚.
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside
the turn) is indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.

INDEX

Figure 2-6 Slip/Skid Indication

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ALTIMETER

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.

EIS

A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude. Turn the large knob for 1000-ft increments, small knob for 100ft increments. If set to Metric mode, the large knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 500-meter increments; the
small knob adjusts the Selected Altitude in 50-meter increments..

Reference
Altitude
(Meters)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Reference
Altitude

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If a Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value has been set, this altitude is also available for
the Selected Altitude.

Altitude
Trend
Vector

Selected
Altitude
Bug

AFCS

Indicated
Altitude

Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

MDA/DH
Altitude
Bug
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)

Barometric
Setting

APPENDICES

Figure 2-7 Altimeter

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters (Figure 2-7). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
Displaying altitude in meters:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent patch. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:

Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the STD BARO Softkey.

Figure 2-8 Standard Barometric Setting

Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
AFCS

1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).

INDEX

APPENDICES

4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude in either direction. This is displayed by the flashing light blue barometric pressure setting
when crossing the transition altitude.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Altitude in the Baro Transition Alert box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key.

EIS

5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the altitude and press the ENT Key.
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 2-9 Baro Transition Alert
(AUX - System Setup Page)

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI; Figure 2-10) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels
at 1000 and 2000 fpm and minor tick marks every 500 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or
descent rate is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the
edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
A magenta chevron is displayed on the VSI to indicate the Required Vertical Speed for reaching a VNV target
altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has generated.

EIS

VERTICAL DEVIATION
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator is only shown for aircraft with GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units when
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

SBAS is available.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-10) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. Full-scale deflection of two dots is 1000 feet. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical
deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section
2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-11) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is
tuned in the active NAV field. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on
a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in
place of the diamond.

AFCS

The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LPV). When an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected navigation
source, the Glidepath Indicator (Figure 2-12) appears as a magenta diamond during the approach. If the
approach type downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the diamond.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

VNV Target
Altitude

Marker
Beacon
Annunciation

Vertical
Speed
Indicator

APPENDICES

Vertical
Deviation
Indicator

Vertical Glideslope
Speed
Indicator
Pointer

Glipepath
Indicator

INDEX

Required
Vertical
Speed

Figure 2-10 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicator (VSI and VDI)

Figure 2-11 Glideslope Indicator

Figure 2-12 Glidepath Indicator

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor tick
marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond connected to a gray dashed line. The HSI also presents
turn rate, course deviation, bearing, and navigation source information. The HSI is available in two formats, a
360˚ compass rose and a 140˚ arc.
Changing the HSI display format:

EIS

1) Press the PFD Softkey
2) Press the HSI FRMT Softkey.
3) Press the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
14

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

12
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3
10

Lateral Deviation Scale

Current Track Indicator

Flight Phase

To/From Indicator

Course Pointer

Navigation Source

Heading Bug

Aircraft Symbol

6
7

Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Card

OBS Mode Active

APPENDICES

Turn Rate Indicator

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Turn Rate and Heading
Trend Vector
14 Current Heading
Lubber Line

INDEX

Figure 2-13 Horizontal Situation Indicator (360˚ HSI)

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
combined To/From Indicator and a sliding deviation indicator, and a deviation scale. Upon station passage, the
To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like a conventional To/From flag. Depending
on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two different ways, an arrowhead (GPS, VOR,
OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
Course Pointer

Current Track Indicator

Flight Phase
Annunciation

EIS

Navigation
Source
Lateral
Deviation
Scale

Course
Deviation
and To/From
Indicator

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 2-14 Arc HSI

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted The light blue
bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. While the HSI is displayed as an arc, if the
Heading Bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose, the digital reading is displayed.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Adjusting the Selected Heading:

Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.

Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.

The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted. While the
HSI is displayed as an arc, the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140˚
currently shown.
Adjusting the Selected Course:

AFCS

Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.

Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Current Track Indicator

Current Heading
Selected
Course
Selected
Heading
Bug

APPENDICES

Selected
Heading

INDEX

Figure 2-15 Heading and Course Indications

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

Figure 2-16 Heading and Course Indications (True)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Nav Angle in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• TRUE - References angles to true north (T)
• MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 2-17 Navigation Angle Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TURN RATE INDICATOR

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than 4
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Standard
Turn Rate

EIS

Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec

Half-standard
Turn Rate

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 2-18 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector

BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

NOTE: When the Arc HSI is displayed, the Bearing Information windows and pointers are disabled.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV and GPS sources by
pressing the PFD Softkey then a BRG Softkey. The bearing pointers are light blue and are single-line (BRG1)
or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information window to indicate the navigation
source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI by a white ring.
Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
Tuning Mode
Bearing 1
Pointer

Frequency
AFCS

Distance

Bearing 2
Pointer

DME Information Window

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Distance to
Bearing Source

No
Waypoint
Selected

Station
Identifier

Bearing
Pointer
Source
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window

Pointer
Bearing
Icon
Source
Bearing 2 Information Window

INDEX

Figure 2-19 HSI with Bearing and DME Information

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows (Figure 2-19) are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following
information:

• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)

• Frequency (NAV)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)

• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source

• Bearing source (NAV, GPS)

EIS

When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and NO DATA is displayed in the information window if
the NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not
selected.
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

DME INFORMATION WINDOW
NOTE: DME radio installation is optional.

AFCS

The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window and shows the DME
label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD), frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance
is replaced by “–.– – NM”. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the radios.
Displaying the DME Information Window:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window above the BRG1 Information Window.
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
NOTE: During a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the CDI on the Arc HSI

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.

EIS

360º HSI

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Arc HSI

Navigation
Source
Scale

Flight
Phase

Navigation
Source

Flight
Phase

CDI

CDI
Scale

CDI

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Crosstrack
Error

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 2-20 Course Deviation Indicator

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

The CDI can display two sources of navigation, GPS or VOR/LOC. The color indicates the current navigation
source, magenta for GPS and green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPSderived distance when navigating GPS. When navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI uses the
same angular deviation as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.

INDEX

Figure 2-21 Navigation Sources

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the light blue tuning box over the
NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the light blue tuning
box over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV1 Selected for Tuning

NAV2 Selected for Tuning
EIS

LOC1
Selected

VOR2
Selected

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

GPS
Selected

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pressing the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-22 Selecting a Navigation Source

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• The final approach fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF

AFCS

• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. GPS steering guidance is not
provided after the switch.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GPS CDI SCALING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, HDG LEG is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.

EIS

The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly
and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Selected in the GPS CDI box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.

APPENDICES

Figure 2-23 GPS CDI Setting
(AUX - System Setup Page)

INDEX

When set to Auto (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-24, Table 2-1).

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Enroute

Terminal

Approach

0.3 nm

1.0 nm

2.0 nm

0.3
0
3 nm

1.0 nm

Terminal

Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Departure
Dep

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

CDI Full-scale Deflection

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Missed
Approach

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 2-24 Automatic CDI Scaling

• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF (see
Glossary for leg type definitions)
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• At 30 nm from the departure airport, the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.

AFCS

• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (4.0 nm).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.

APPENDICES

• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (Figures 2-25 and 2-26). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is activated or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.

2 nm

FAF

CDI scale varies if VTF is activated

0.3 nm

1.0 nm

2 nm

FAF

EIS

angle based
on database
information

course width

angle set
by system

CDI Full-scale Deflection

0.3 nm

1.0 nm

CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system

350 ft

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

CDI Full-scale Deflection

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

Landing
Threshold

CDI scale varies if VTF is activated

Figure 2-25 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling

Figure 2-26 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LPV and LP Approach CDI Scaling

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic

Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN

Approach
(Non-precision)

LNAV

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Approach
(Non-precision with
Vertical Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Approach
(LP)
Missed Approach

Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
4.0 nm

1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (Figure 2-25)
LNAV + V
L/VNAV
LPV

1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (Figure 2-26)

LP
MAPR

0.3 nm

* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.

INDEX

Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current Active-to waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. OBS is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.

EIS

While OBS is enabled, a course line is drawn through the Active-to waypoint on the moving map. If
desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation, with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight plan on the moving map retains the modified course line.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

GPS
Selected

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Extended
Course
Line

OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Figure 2-27 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-28. Pressing the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

SUSP
Softkey

SUSP
Annunciation

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 2-28 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Pressing the DFLTS Softkey turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset Map and wind data display.

In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.

TEMPERATURE DISPLAYS

EIS

The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) and deviation from International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) temperature
are displayed in the lower left corner of the PFD under normal conditions, or below the true airspeed in
Reversionary Display Mode. Both are displayed in degrees Celsius (°C).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Normal Display

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Reversionary Mode

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 2-29 Outside Air Temperature

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

WIND DATA

Option 1

Option 2

Option 3

No Data

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in three different ways.

Figure 2-30 Wind Data

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey to display wind data to the left of the HSI.
3) Press one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components

AFCS

• OPTN 2: Wind direction arrow and speed
• OPTN 3: Wind direction arrow with headwind/tailwind and crosswind components

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) To remove the window, press the OFF Softkey.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in the table.
Top of Descent Message

EIS

VNV Target
Altitude

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

GPS is the
Selected
Navigation
Source

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator

Phase of
Flight

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 2-31 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

VNV Indication Removed
Criteria
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed

APPENDICES

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.

SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

The System Messages Window conveys messages to the flight crew regarding problems with the G1000
System. When a new message is issued, the MSG Softkey flashes to alert the flight crew. It continues to flash
until selected, which opens the System Messages Window and acknowledges the message(s) which initiated
the flashing. When the window is open, messages for which the trigger conditions no longer exist turn gray.
Messages generated while the window is open are not automatically displayed, but cause the MSG Softkey to
begin flashing again. Pressing the MSG Softkey while the System Messages Window is open closes the window,
unless the MSG Softkey is flashing.

CAS Window

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

System
Messages
Window

Softkey
Annunciation

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 2-32 G1000 Alerting System

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS

Outer Marker

Middle Marker

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in yellow, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Inner Marker

EIS

Altimeter
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 2-33 Marker Beacon Annunciations

TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Traffic is displayed symbolically on the PFD Inset Map, the MFD Navigation Map Page, and various other
MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix F for more details about the Traffic
Information Service (TIS) and optional Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS). When a traffic advisory (TA) is detected,
the following automatically occur:
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled and displays traffic

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• A flashing black-on-yellow TRAFFIC annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator for five
seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
• A single “TRAFFIC” aural alert is heard, unless an optional Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed. Refer
to the applicable TAS documentation for alerts generated by TAS equipment.

AFCS

If additional TAs appear, new aural and visual alerts are generated.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Traffic
Symbols

APPENDICES

Figure 2-34 Traffic Annunciation and Inset Map with Traffic Displayed

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

TAWS ANNUNCIATIONS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) annunciations appear on the PFD at the top left of the Altimeter.
Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix A for information on TAWS alerts and annunciations.

Figure 2-35 Traffic and Example TAWS Annunciations

ALTITUDE ALERTING
AFCS

Altitude Alerting provides the pilot with a visual alert when approaching the Selected Altitude. Whenever the
Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The following occur when approaching the Selected
Altitude: Altitude Alerting is independent of the Garmin AFCS.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to black text on a light
blue background and flashes for five seconds.
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude
changes to light blue text on a black background and flashes for five seconds.

APPENDICES

• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude) an aural tone is heard. The Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background and
flashes for five seconds.

INDEX

Within 1000 ft

Within 200 ft

Deviation of ±200 ft

Figure 2-36 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: A Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when SBAS is available. This annunciation is only

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

available when TAWS alerting has been inhibited, has failed, or is unavailable.
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow LOW ALT annunciation appears to the top left of the Altimeter, flashes
for several seconds, then remains displayed until the condition is resolved.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 2-37 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach

MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

For altitude awareness, a barometric Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH) can be set
in the REFERENCES Window.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

If desired, the system can also compensate this altitude based on a pilot-supplied temperature at the
destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases the
displayed MDA/DH accordingly.
When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the bottom left of the Altimeter. Once the altitude is
within the range of the tape, a bug appears at the reference altitude on the Altimeter. The following visual
annunciations occur when approaching the MDA/DH:

AFCS

• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, a box labeled ‘BARO MIN’
or ‘COMP MIN’ (based on the selected altitude source) appears with the altitude in cyan text (or magenta
for TEMP COMP). The bug appears in cyan (or magenta for TEMP COMP) on the altitude tape at the
corresponding altitude once in range.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text become white.
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text become yellow and the audio alert, “Minimums.
Minimums”, is heard.
Within 2500 ft

Within 100 ft

Altitude Reached

APPENDICES
INDEX

Barometric
Minimum
Bug
Barometric
Minimum
Box
Figure 2-38 Barometric MDA/DH Alerting Visual Annunciations

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the MDA.
If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA, once it reaches 50 feet above the MDA, alerting
is disabled.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The MDA/DH may be set from either PFD and is synchronized on both PFDs. The function is reset when the
power is cycled or a new approach is activated.
Setting the barometric minimum descent altitude and bug:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.

EIS

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the barometric (BARO) or temperature compensated (TEMP COMP) barometric
altitude. OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (BARO or TEMP COMP from zero to 16,000 feet). If TEMP
COMP is selected, a field for entering the temperature at the destination will appear. Press the ENT Key or turn
the large FMS Knob to highlight this field, and use the small FMS Knob to enter the temperature (from -59º C
to +59º C.) The system increases or decreases the displayed MDA/DH altitude based on this temperature.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or press the TMR/REF Softkey.

Figure 2-39 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH

NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the REFERENCES Window on the PFD, or

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window on the MFD. There is only one compensation temperature
for the system, therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and
the minimums. Refer to the Flight Management section for information about applying temperature
compensation to approach altitudes.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

2.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur (Figure
2-40). Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
LOI

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for five seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints

EIS

INTEG OK

Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol

Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 2-40 Example HSI Annunciations

AFCS

In Dead Reckoning Mode the CDI is removed from the display when GPS is the selected navigation source.
The following items on the PFD are then shown in yellow:
• Current Track Bug
• Wind Data

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Ground Speed
• Distances in the Bearing Information Windows
• GPS bearing pointers

APPENDICES

These items should be verified when operating in Dead Reckoning Mode as they become increasingly
inaccurate over time.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS

UNUSUAL ATTITUDES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red chevrons pointing toward the horizon warn of extreme
pitch. The chevrons are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon
line.
Nose Low

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Nose High

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Traffic Annunciations

• System Time

• AFCS Annunciations

• PFD Setup Menu

•
Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout

• Inset Map
• Outside air temperature (OAT)

• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:

• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators

• ISA temperature deviation

– Timer/References

• Altimeter Barometric Setting

• Wind data

– Nearest Airports

• Selected Altitude

• Selected Heading readout

– Flight Plan

• VNV Target Altitude

• Selected Course readout

– Messages

• Ground Speed

• Transponder Status Box

– Procedures

• True Airspeed

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from each PFD and their softkeys are disabled when the aircraft experiences
unusual attitudes:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 2-41 Pitch Attitude Warnings

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM (EIS)
NOTE: Refer to the Aircraft Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G1000 offers improved flight operations and reduces crew workload by automatically monitoring critical
system parameters during all phases of flight using the following:
• The Engine Indication System (EIS) displays electrical, fuel, engine, and flight control information on the
left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD). EIS information can also be fully expanded to an entire page by
pressing the ENGINE Softkey or turning the large FMS Knob to select the EIS - Engine Page.

EIS

In combination with the EIS, aural alerts, additional avionics messages, and master indicators are used to
inform the crew of aberrant flight conditions. The system also provides an improved level of maintenance data
for the ground crew.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS Display

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 3-1 MFD with EIS display

APPENDICES

Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate caution
and warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation not yet in the
caution or warning ranges. When unsafe operating conditions occur, the corresponding readouts flash to indicate
cautions and warnings. If sensory data to an instrument becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed
across the instrument.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

EICAS
EIS

3.1 ENGINE DISPLAY

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

AFCS

8
9

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

APPENDICES

Figure 3-3 EIS when Engine Page is displayed

INDEX

Figure 3-2 Engine Display

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

Propeller Sync Indicator

Points towards the higher-speed propeller when the propellers are out of
sync.

Exhaust Gas Temperature
(EGT °F)

Displays the exhaust gas temperature in °F

Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)

Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)

Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PSI)

Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)

Oil Temperature Indicator Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
(OIL °F)

Alternator Current (ALTR
AMPS)

Displays each alternator current in amperes

Voltage (VOLTS)

Displays the bus voltage.

Battery Current(BATT
AMPS)

Displays the battery current in amperes

Fuel Quantity Indicator
(FUEL QTY GAL)

Displays the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for each side of a standard fuel
tank.

Landing Gear Status
(LANDING GEAR)

Displays landing gear status

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Tachometer (RPM)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine power

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Engine Manifold Pressure
Gauge (MAP INHG)

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

3.2 ENGINE PAGE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The EIS - Engine Page displays all engine, fuel, fuel calculation, electrical, and trim information. To access
this page, press the ENGINE Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob and select the EIS - Engine Page.
ENGINE

EICAS
EIS

ENGINE

DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL

Select the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.

Figure 3-4 Engine Page Softkeys

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

ENGINE

Level 1

ENGINE

Level 2
ENGINE

Description

LEAN

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

DEC
FUEL
LEAN
ENGINE
INC FUEL
RST FUEL

SYSTEM

CYL SLCT

BACK

ASSIST

Displays EIS - Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to exit
page
(optional)
Decreases displayed
fuel remaining in 1-gal
increments BACK
SYSTEM
DEC FUEL INC FUEL RST FUEL
CO RST
Increases displayed fuel remaining in 1-gal increments
Selectfuel
the BACK
Softkey
Resets displayed fuel remaining to maximum
capacity
forto aircraft and fuel used
return to the top-level softkeys.
to zero
15

AFCS

1
2
3
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4
5

APPENDICES

6
11

INDEX

10
8

Figure 3-5 Engine Page

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

Exhaust Gas Temperature Displays the exhaust gas temperature in °F
(EGT °F)

Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFLOW GPH)

Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (gph)

Oil Pressure Indicator
(OIL PSI)

Displays oil pressure in pounds per square inch (psi)

Oil Temperature Indicator Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F)
(OIL °F)

Landing Gear Status
(LANDING GEAR)

Displays landing gear status

Fuel Calculations Group
(FUEL CALC)

Displays calculated fuel used (GAL USED), endurance (ENDUR), and range
(in nautical miles, RANGE NM), and fuel efficiency (in nautical miles per
gallon, NMPG) based on the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the
fuel flow totalizer

Flap Setting Indicator
(SYSTEM)

Displays the setting of the flaps in degrees.

Electrical Group
(ELECTRICAL)

Displays alternator (ALTR AMPS) and battery (BATT AMPS) currents in
amperes and bus voltage (VOLTS)

Engine Hours (TACH
TIME)

Displays the total time in hours the engine has been in service

Exhaust Gas Temperature Displays the exhaust gas temperatures for all cylinders in °F
Bar Graph (EGT °F)

Displays cylinder head temperatures in °F
Cylinder Head
Temperatures (CHT °F)

Fuel Quantity Gauges
(FUEL)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Points towards the higher-speed propeller when the propellers are out of
sync.

AFCS

Propeller Sync Indicator

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute (rpm)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Tachometer (RPM)

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Engine Manifold Pressure Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury (in Hg) to indicate engine power
Gauge (MAP INHG)

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDICES

Displays the total amount of fuel and the amount of fuel in gallons (gal) for
each side of a standard fuel tank

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

ELECTRICAL

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

DC current for the left and right alternators (pointers labeled “L” and “R”) and voltage for the DC bus are
shown along color-coded horizontal scales, with readouts above the scale. The ammeter displays the battery
load in amperes (amps) along a horizontal scale, with a white tick mark indicating zero amps. The horizontal
scales and pointers will not appear in Reversionary Mode.

EICAS
EIS

Alternator
Current

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Bus Voltage

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Ammeter

Figure 3-6 Electrical Group

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

EXHAUST GAS TEMPERATURE BAR GRAPH

AFCS

Exhaust Gas (EGT) temperatures in degrees Fahrenheit are displayed for each cylinder using a bar graph on
the Engine Page. A temperature readout for each cylinder is shown at the top of the graph. Cylinders whose
EGTs are in the normal range appear in white. The temperature readout is replaced with white dashes if the
temperature exceeds the normal range.
Normal
Temperature
Range Exceeded

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Exhaust Gas
Temperatures

INDEX

Figure 3-7 Exhaust Gas Temperature

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FUEL CALCULATIONS
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

the fuel was reset.
Fuel used (GAL USED), endurance (ENDUR), range (in nautical miles, RANGE NM), and fuel efficiency (in
nautical miles per gallon, NMPG) are calculated based on the displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) and the
fuel flow totalizer. The calculated range also takes into account the aircraft’s heading and the wind direction
and speed.

EIS

Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:

On the Engine Page, use the DEC FUEL and INC FUEL softkeys to obtain the desired fuel remaining (GAL REM).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Resetting the fuel totalizer:

On the Engine Page, select the RST FUEL Softkey; this resets displayed fuel remaining (GAL REM) to the
maximum fuel capacity for the aircraft and fuel used to zero.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Set Fuel Remaining
Calculated Fuel Used
Calculated Endurance
Calculated Range

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Fuel Efficiency
Figure 3-9 Fuel Calculations Group

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations is the Fuel Range Ring, which graphically illustrates the
aircraft’s remaining range based on the endurance (ENDUR), heading, groundspeed, and wind direction and
speed. The solid green circle represents the range until all the remaining fuel is depleted. The dashed green
circle indicates the aircraft range until only reserve fuel remains. Once on reserve fuel, the range is indicated
by a solid yellow circle.
The Fuel Range Ring shifts position in relation to the aircraft according to wind effects. For example, more
fuel is required for flying into a headwind, and the aircraft’s decreased range in that direction is indicated by
the Fuel Range Ring shifting toward the tail of the Aircraft Symbol.

EICAS
EIS

The amount of reserve fuel (only for purposes of the Fuel Range Ring) is set on the Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu in terms of remaining flight time. When enabled the Fuel Range Ring appears on the Navigation
Map Page, the Weather Data Link Page, and PFD Inset Map.
Press the MENU
Key to Display
Navigation Map
Page Setup Menu

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Total Range
(Based on Endurance)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Time to
Reserve Fuel

Range to Reserve Fuel
(Based on Endurance
Minus Reserve Fuel Time)
Set Flight Time
Remaining on
Reserve Fuel
(Reserve Fuel Time)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Difference of
Ranges Based on
Reserve Fuel Time

AFCS

Figure 3-10 Fuel Range Ring and Setup

Enabling/disabling the Fuel Range Ring and selecting a reserve fuel time:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Display the Navigation Map Page (press and hold the CLR Key for 2 seconds to quickly select this map).
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Map Setup’ and press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.

APPENDICES

4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.

INDEX

7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the reserve fuel time, how long the aircraft can fly after reaching the
reserve fuel.
8) Enter the desired reserve fuel time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes) and press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

OIL PRESSURE AND TEMPERATURE GAUGES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Engine oil pressure and temperature for each engine are shown along horizontal bar indicators. Oil pressure
is shown in pounds per square inch (psi) and temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F). If the oil pressure pointer
enters the yellow band, a caution is issued. If the oil pressure or oil temperature pointers enter the red band,
a warning is issued.

EIS

Figure 3-11 Oil Pressure and Temperature Gauges

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

FUEL QUANTITY

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The fuel display shows the fuel quantity in each tank in gallons (gal). Fuel quantity for each tank is normally
shown along a vertical slider scale with corresponding readouts below each gauge. A total fuel quantity readout
is shown at the bottom of the display between the fuel quantity gauges. A caution or warning is issued for low
fuel quantity.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Tank Fuel
Quantities
AFCS

Total Fuel Quantity
Figure 3-13 Fuel Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

LANDING GEAR INDICATIONS
Landing Gear statuses are shown using the indications in the following table.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Position

EIS

Engine Page

EICAS
EIS

Up &
Locked

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

In Transition

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Down and
Locked

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Warning

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Table 3-2 Landing Gear Indications

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

EIS DISPLAY (REVERSIONARY MODE)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Should a system detected failure occur on the MFD, the PFD automatically enters reversionary mode. Should
a system detected failure occur on the PFD, reversionary mode must be activated manually, if desired. Refer to
the System Overview section for more information.
The Engine Display, in reversionary mode, is identical to the normal EIS Display on the MFD.
EIS Display

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 3-14 Reversionary Mode (EIS Shown)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EICAS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM

Blank Page

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panel and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the G1000 is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Audio Panel

• Multifunction Display (MFD)

• Mode S Transponder

EIS

• Primary Flight Display (PFD)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
system, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Mode S Transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD). The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active
four-digit code, mode, and a reply status (Figure 4-1).

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

9
10

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, NAV/COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, and NRST Window

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.

COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.

COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.

COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.

COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.

Nearest Airports Window – Display by pressing NRST Softkey.

ENT Key – Validates or confirms an Auto-tune selection.

FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes and Auto-tune entries
when NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large
knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted
cursor location.

Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

GMA 1347 AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
1

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

AFCS

Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.

COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.

COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.

COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.

COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.

COM3 MIC – Reserved for optional COM radio.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker (if installed). COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard
on the speaker.

MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Also, stops play of recorded
COM audio.

HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.

DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.

NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.

ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.

NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.

AUX – Not used in the PA-44-180.

MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the PILOT Knob
to illuminate SQ. Turn the PILOT/PASS Knobs to adjust squelch.

PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded
block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.

PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.

COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.

PILOT Knob – Press to switch between volume and squelch control as indicated by illumination of VOL
or SQ. Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.

PASS Knob – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. The MAN SQ Key must be
selected to allow squelch adjustment.

DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

TEL – Selects and deselects telephone audio.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

COM 1/2 – Split COM operation key. When selected, the pilot uses the COM 1 transceiver and the copilot
uses COM 2.

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

COM3 – Reserved for optional COM radio.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.2 COM OPERATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: During PA Mode, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the COM active frequency color

changes to white, indicating that neither COM transmitter is active.
NOTE: When turning on the G1000 for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active

EIS

COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and the
two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the
COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected for transmission,
audio from the other COM radio is muted.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM
radio is selected for transmitting (PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel).
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in either white or gray. The standby frequency in the tuning
box is white. The other standby frequency is gray.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Active
Fields

Standby
Fields

AFCS

Tuning Box

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

COM2 Radio is Selected
on the Audio Panel

Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit

INDEX

APPENDICES

COM3 is reserved for an optional COM radio.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow.

EIS

Transmit and
Receive Indicators

Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications

COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of each PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.

AFCS

Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off

Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box

APPENDICES

Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.

EIS

Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One COM Radio to the Other

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-6 Switching COM Tuning Boxes

QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Press for Two Seconds
to Load 121.500 MHz

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 4-7 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz

100

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS,
WX)
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page

• NRST – Nearest Airports Page

AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD

EIS

COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 4-8 Nearest Airports Window

Select the NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest
Airports Window

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

101

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-10, 4-11, and 4-12).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
selecting the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-11).

EIS

3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies

Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Box

Figure 4-9 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Or:
1) On the Nearest Airports, Frequencies, or Airspaces page, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.

AFCS

4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.

102

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Nearest Frequencies Menu

Nearest Airspaces Menu

EIS

Nearest Airports Menu

Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Runway
Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Press ENT Key to load
frequency into PFD
COM Standby Field.
Cursor then advances
to the next frequency.
Select INFO Softkey for
AIRPORT, RUNWAYS,
and FREQUENCIES
Windows

APPENDICES

Figure 4-11 WPT – Airport Information Page

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

103

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 4-12 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages

104

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FREQUENCY SPACING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G1000 COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing
(118.000 to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing
is selected, all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.

25-kHz Channel
Spacing

EIS

8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-13 COM Channel Spacing

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.

While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the G1000 softkeys are blank.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing

INDEX

Figure 4-14 AUX – System Setup Page

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

105

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUTOMATIC SQUELCH

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.

EIS

When Automatic Squelch is disabled, a white SQ appears next to the COM frequency.

Squelch
Indication

Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-15 Overriding Automatic Squelch

VOLUME

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 4-16 COM Volume Level

COM Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds

106

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.

EIS

A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are
placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Active
Fields

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Standby
Fields

Tuning Box
AFCS

The NAV Radio is
Selected by Selecting
the CDI Softkey

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 4-17 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation

APPENDICES

See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
as the source for the bearing pointer.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

107

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, DME, or ADF Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. Selected audio can be heard
over the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-18 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver

NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the MFD and PFDs.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.

AFCS

Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 4-19 NAV Frequency Tuning

108

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One NAV Radio to the Other

EIS

Figure 4-20 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Morse Code Identifier
for the GHM VOR is On

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing
the small NAV Knob and pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.

Station
Identifier
Figure 4-21 NAV Radio ID Indication

AFCS

VOLUME
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.

APPENDICES

NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds

Figure 4-22 NAV Volume Levels

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

109

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

• WPT – VOR Information

• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)

• NRST – Nearest Airports

• NRST – Nearest Airspaces

NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR

EIS

The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-23, 4-24, and 4-25).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
selecting the appropriate softkey.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR, Nearest Airspaces, and Nearest Airports pages, select the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor
on the NAV frequency (Figure 4-25).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.

AFCS

Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies

Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD

110

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Nearest VOR Menu

Nearest Frequencies Menu

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Nearest Airports Menu

Nearest Airspaces Menu

Figure 4-24 Nearest Pages Menus

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

111

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Select the VOR Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Identifier

Select the FREQ Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Frequency

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 4-25 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page

112

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST
–
Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 4-26 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

113

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as

the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.

EIS

When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.

114

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Middle Marker
Indication

Inner Marker
Indication

EIS

Outer Marker
Indication

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 4-27 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 4-28 Marker Beacon Keys
AFCS

The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations (Figure 4-27). The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The
MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker
beacon signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while
marker beacon audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.

APPENDICES

Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

115

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.4 GTX 33 MODE S TRANSPONDER

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The GTX 33 Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.

EIS

• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
• Extended squitter – Transmits the Automatic Dependent Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) position, velocity, and
heading information periodically without requiring an interrogation.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.

TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is selected, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, ADS-B TX, BACK.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

When the CODE Softkey is selected, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Selecting the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, selecting the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Selecting the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
Selecting the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Selecting the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.

APPENDICES

The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Selecting the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.

INDEX

After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.

116

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

ALT

GND

VFR

CODE

IDENT

ADS-B TX

BACK

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

IDENT

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

STBY

XPDR

MSG

Selecting the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.

EIS

IDENT

BKSP

BACK

MSG

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Selecting the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.

Figure 4-29 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.

GROUND MODE

AFCS

Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground. The transponder
powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down. Ground Mode can be overridden by selecting any one
of the Mode Selection Softkeys. A green GND indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of
the Transponder Data Box. In Ground Mode, the transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies,
but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When Standby Mode has been selected on the ground, the transponder can be returned to Ground Mode
by selecting the GND Softkey.

APPENDICES

GND
Mode

Figure 4-30 Ground Mode

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

117

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

Standby Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder does
not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is selected, a white STBY indication
and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In all other modes, these fields
appear in green.

NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.

EIS

STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-31 Standby Mode

MANUAL ON MODE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

ON Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder
code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)

Figure 4-32 ON Mode

AFCS

ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by selecting the ALT Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.

APPENDICES

ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)

INDEX

Figure 4-33 Altitude Mode

118

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Reply to
Interrogation

Figure 4-34 Reply Indication
EIS

ADS-B TX MODE

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Press the ADS-B TX Softkey to enable/disable the transmission of the ADS-B information. ADS-B
transmission defaults to enabled at each power cycle. Do not disable ADS-B transmission unless requested
by ATC.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

ADS-B Transmission
Enabled
Figure 4-35 Altitude Mode

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.

AFCS

3) Select the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be selected within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Selecting the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Entering
a Code

APPENDICES

Figure 4-36 Entering a Code

Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Select the XPDR and the CODE Softkeys as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.

INDEX

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

119

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field

Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time

EIS

Figure 4-37 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

VFR CODE
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by selecting the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is selected, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

VFR Code

Figure 4-38 VFR Code

IDENT FUNCTION

AFCS

NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Selecting the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is selected, a green IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
After the IDENT Softkey is selected while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.

APPENDICES

IDNT
Indication

INDEX

Select the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
Figure 4-39 IDENT Softkey and Indication

120

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT ID REPORTING
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

center for configuration.
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed in the Timer/References
Window on the PFD. The Flight ID is not to exceed seven characters. No space is needed when entering Flight
ID. When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight ID entry.
If configuration is set to “SAME AS TAIL” the aircraft tail number will always be displayed.

EIS

Entering a Flight ID:
1) Select the TMR/REF Softkey to display the Timer/References Window.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor, if not already activated.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry. The word “updating” appears until the new entry is completed.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If an error is made during Flight ID entry, pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry. While
entering a Flight ID, turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent
of rotation. If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct Flight ID
using the same procedure.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Flight ID
PFD Entry
Figure 4-40 Timer/References Window, Entering Flight ID

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

121

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

POWER-UP
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.

MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
EIS

Stereo headsets are recommended for use with the G1000.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset channel output to ground. While this does
not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel in both ears.
If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions, any other passenger using a stereo headset hears
audio in the left ear only.

SPEAKER

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker (if installed). Pressing the SPKR Key selects and
deselects the cabin speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings
(autopilot, traffic, altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Volume can be adjusted though configuration.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 4-41 Speaker Key

122

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

INTERCOM

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) and a stereo music input for the pilot, copilot
and up to four passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and aircraft
radios.

EIS

Figure 4-42 Intercom Controls

PILOT KEY
Annunciator

COPLT KEY
Annunciator

Pilot Hears

Copilot Hears

OFF

Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot,
passengers, music

OFF

Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot

Copilot,
passengers,
music

OFF

Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot;
passengers, music

Copilot

Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, passengers,
music

Selected radios, aural
alerts, pilot, copilot

Passengers;
music

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Passenger Hears

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.

APPENDICES

When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

123

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The PILOT/PASS Knob controls volume or manual squelch adjustment for the pilot and copilot/passenger.
The small knob controls the pilot volume and squelch. The large knob controls the copilot/passenger volume
and squelch. The VOL and SQ annunciations at the bottom of the unit indicate which function the knob is
controlling. Pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob switches between volume and squelch control as indicated by
the VOL or SQ annunciation being illuminated.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the squelch setting.

EIS

• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the PILOT/PASS Knob
controls only the volume (pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the PILOT/PASS Knob controls
either volume or squelch (selected by pressing the PILOT/PASS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ
annunciation).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Manual Squelch Annunciator;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
Automatic/Manual Squelch

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pilot Volume or Manual
Squelch. Press to switch
between VOL and SQ. Turn
to adjust Squelch when SQ
Annunciation is lit, Volume
when VOL Annunciation is lit.

Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch

AFCS

Volume Annunciation

Squelch Annunciation

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 4-43 Volume/Squelch Control

124

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PASSENGER ADDRESS (PA) SYSTEM

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A passenger address system is available for delivering voice messages over the cabin speaker. When the PA
Key is pressed on the Audio Panel, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished, and the active COM frequency
changes to white, indicating that there is no COM selected. A Push-to-Talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA
announcements. The PA Annunciator flashes about once per second while the PTT is depressed.

EIS

PA Key is Selected on
the Audio Panel

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-44 PA Key Selected for Cabin Announcements

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest
block.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. The PLAY Annunciator flashes to indicate when play is in progress. The PLAY Annunciator turns off
after the present memory block has finished playing.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.

AFCS

Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block. Each
subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 4-45 Play Key

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

125

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

SPLIT COM OPERATION
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. COM1 and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the annunciator
is extinguished.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

COM1 Radio is Used
by the Pilot

AFCS

COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 4-46 Split COM Operation

126

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS
NOTE: Music1 and Music2 audio cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for the crew and passengers

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: Music1 and Music2. The pilot and
copilot hear Music1 and the passengers hear Music2. These inputs are compatible with popular portable
entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5-mm stereo phone jacks can be installed in
convenient locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged
into the Music1 or Music2 jacks.

EIS

The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input (see Table 4‑1).

CREW MUSIC
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Crew music (Music1) can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT and the COPLT ICS
Annunciators are extinguished. Crew music can also be heard by the pilot when the COPLT Annunciator is
illuminated and by the copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Music Muting
Crew music muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. Crew music is always
soft muted when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual return of music to
its original volume level. The time required for music volume to return to normal is between one-half and
four seconds.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Music Muting Enable/Disable
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches crew music muting on and off.
When switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two
beeps indicate music muting is disabled. Crew music muting is reset (enabled) during power up.

AFCS

PASSENGER MUSIC
Passenger music (Music2) can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

127

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,

verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ is activated, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If

EIS

manual squelch is set to full open (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise) background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

After powering up the G1000 System, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well
as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Automatic/Manual
Squelch

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys

Pilot Volume
or Manual
Squelch

Copilot/Passenger
Volume or
Manual Squelch
Squelch
Annunciation

AFCS

Volume
Annunciation

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 4-47 Audio Panel Controls

Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
2) Verify that manual squelch is set to full open.

APPENDICES

3) Turn the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob fully clockwise. This will set the headset intercom audio level to max
volume (least amount of attenuation).
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob volume to the desired intercom level.

INDEX

6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.

Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.

128

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Abnormal operation of the G1000 includes equipment failures of the G1000 components and failure of
associated equipment, including switches and external devices.

STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.

EIS

The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 4-48 Stuck Microphone Alert

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

COM TUNING FAILURE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically

Figure 4-49 COM Tuning Failure
AFCS

AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio will not be available on the speaker.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

PFD FAILURE (REVERSIONARY MODE)
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview Section for
more information on Reversionary Mode.

APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 4-50 Display Backup Button

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

129

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUDIO PANEL AND CNS

Blank Page

130

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

5.1 INTRODUCTION
The G1000 is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section of
the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the G1000.

EIS

The most prominent part of the G1000 are the full color displays: a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a
Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of flight
management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the GPS navigation data on the PFD and MFD follows.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV,
LP, LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)). L/VNAV, LP, and LPV approaches are only available with SBAS. L/VNAV
will be flown as LNAV when SBAS is not available.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Pressing the INSET Softkey again, then pressing the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by pressing the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).

AFCS

An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).

APPENDICES

The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

131

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Navigation Status Box

Navigation Mode
Inset Map

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Navigation Status Box

Navigation Page Title

Map Orientation
Navigation Map

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Aircraft Icon
at Present Position

Map Range
Flight Plan Leg

Active Flight Plan Leg

APPENDICES

Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page

NAVIGATION STATUS BOX

INDEX

The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:

PFD Navigation Status Box

132

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next
waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD
within 1 minute’)

• Bearing (BRG)

The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Symbol

Direct-to

• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Endurance (END)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)

EIS

Description
Active Leg

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the
MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of
the following items:

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD ->
KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn
right to 021˚ in 8 seconds’)

• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)

Left Procedure Turn
Right Holding Pattern

• Fuel on Board (FOB)
• Fuel over Destination (FOD)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)

Vector to Final

• Track Angle Error (TKE)
• Track (TRK)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Left DME Arc

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Left Holding Pattern

Right DME Arc

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Right Procedure Turn

• Crosstrack Error (XTK)

MFD Navigation Status Box
AFCS

The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

APPENDICES

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data.
6) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

133

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Map displays are used extensively in the G1000 to provide situational awareness in flight. Most G1000 maps
can display the following information:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data • Aircraft icon (representing present position)
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with • Nav range ring
names
• Fuel range ring
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing to
pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent • Flight plan legs
information)
• User waypoints
• Map range
• Track vector
• Wind direction and speed

• Topography scale

• Map orientation

• Topography data

• Icons for enabled map features

• Obstacle data

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Map Group Pages (MAP)
• Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)

• Direct-to Window

• AUX - Trip Planning

• PFD Inset Map

• All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)

• Procedure Loading Pages

MAP ORIENTATION

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.

INDEX

Figure 5-3 Map Orientation

• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.

134

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

• Desired track up (DTK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not

show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show

navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page:
EIS

Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Map Setup
Selection

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.

AFCS

Map Group Selection
Orientation Field

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group
INDEX

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

135

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

MAP RANGE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the G1000 to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Range Overzoom

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-6 Map Range

AUTO ZOOM

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window). Auto zoom is suspended while the map pointer is active.

AFCS

If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact points If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map page capable of
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFDs and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.

APPENDICES

• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.

INDEX

• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.

136

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.

EIS

Manual Range Override
Expiration Time

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Auto Zoom:

Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On

Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom

Configuring automatic zoom:
AFCS

1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.

APPENDICES

7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘TIME OUT’ (zero to 99 minutes).
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

137

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Map Pointer
Information

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Map
Pointer

Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated

APPENDICES

NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has

been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.

INDEX

When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.

138

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Information about
Point of Interest

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

Map Pointer on POI

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.

Information about
Airspace

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Map Pointer on
Airspace

APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

139

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.

Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

3) Press the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

NAVAID
Information

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

GO BACK Softkey

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID

140

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.

EIS

Airspace
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

141

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).

EIS

2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
Measurement Information

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pointer Lat/Long

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Measurement Line

INDEX

Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance

142

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TOPOGRAPHY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
Navigation Map
Black Background

EIS

TOPO Off

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
TOPO Softkey
Enabled

TOPO On

Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the TOPO Softkey.
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.

Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
AFCS

2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

143

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

TOPO DATA
On/Off

TOPO DATA
Range

Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.

AFCS

3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

INDEX

In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.

144

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Aircraft Altitude (MSL)

Range of
Displayed
Elevations

Ground Elevation at Pointer
Location (only visible when
Pointer is displayed)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE

Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

TOPO SCALE
On/Off

Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

145

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

MAP SYMBOLS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.

LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols

EIS

(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg))

Symbol

Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)

Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)

Off

2000

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Highways and Roads

Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)

300

800

International Highway (FREEWAY)

300

800

US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)

State Highway (LOCAL HWY)

Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)

Railroads (RAILROAD)

LARGE CITY (> 200,000)

800

1500

MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)

100

200

SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)

20
800

50
1500

Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)

200

500

USER WAYPOINT

150

300

N/A

INDEX

APPENDICES

Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information

146

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols

Symbol

Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)

2000
500
300
100
20
100
30

Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)

VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)

150

300

Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)

200

500

Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)

200

500

Class D Airspace (CLASS D)

150

300

Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)

200

500

Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]

200

500

Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)

200

500

Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)

500

2000

See Airports, NAVAIDs

See Additional Features
N/A

APPENDICES

2000
250
150
50
3
Off
15

Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)
Large Airports (LARGE APT)
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT)
Small Airports (SMALL APT)
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2000

AFCS

2000

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2000

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2000

EIS

Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg))

Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

147

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYMBOL SETUP

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.

EIS

3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

LAND DATA
On/Off

AFCS

Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND DATA Setup

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.

APPENDICES

2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
6) Select the desired text size.
INDEX

7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.

148

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

8) Select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)

Maximum Display Range

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Maximum Display Range

AFCS

Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup

NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

149

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
MAP DECLUTTER

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.

Declutter Level

EIS

DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications

Decluttering the map:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Press the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Press the ENT Key.

Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

2) Press the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.

150

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Table 5-3 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries

Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

AFCS

Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

151

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AIRWAYS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Low Altitude Airways (or Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine, propeller-driven airplanes on
shorter routes and at lower altitudes. Airways are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground
level (AGL) and extend up to but not including 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are
designated with a “V” before the airway number (hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily
between VORs.

EIS

High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and turbocharged piston
aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)

INDEX

Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Page

152

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAY Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Displaying/removing airways:
1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed.
3) Press the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only.
4) Press the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only.

EIS

5) Press the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed.
Or:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

Off, All, LO Only, HI Only

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Airway Display Selection

Low Altitude Airway Range
High Altitude Airway Range

Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup
AFCS

The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

APPENDICES

4) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

153

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Airway Type

Symbol

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY)

Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500

High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)

300

500

Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
EIS

TRACK VECTOR

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid light blue line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable
(30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always a straight line for
the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Track Vector

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector

Displaying/removing the track vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.

AFCS

2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.

INDEX

APPENDICES

7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

154

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Nav Range Ring On/Off

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Wind Vector On/Off

Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Fuel Range
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu -TRACK VECTOR, WIND VECTOR, NAV RANGE RING, FUEL RANGE RING Setup

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

WIND VECTOR
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Wind Direction

Wind Speed
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector

AFCS

NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint

Information pages.
Displaying/removing the wind vector:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.

APPENDICES

4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

155

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

NAV RANGE RING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Range (radius)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Nav Range Ring

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring

NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to

Window map.

AFCS

Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.

APPENDICES

7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX

INDEX

- System Setup Page.

156

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FUEL RANGE RING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.

Total Endurance Range
Time to Reserve Fuel

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Range to Reserve Fuel

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.

AFCS

4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.

APPENDICES

8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

157

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FIELD OF VIEW (SVS)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision System (SVS) lateral field of view. The field
of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is only
available if SVS is installed on the aircraft.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries

Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View

Displaying/removing the field of view:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

AFCS

5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

158

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a light blue arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Range to
Altitude Arc
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-30 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc

Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘SEL ALT ARC’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

159

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.3 WAYPOINTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in the G1000. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, the G1000’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the
database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to
navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint
pages.
Identifier Entry Field

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

City Entry Field

Facility
Entry Field

Entered Waypoint on
Map

Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Waypoint Location

APPENDICES

Figure 5-31 Waypoint Information Window

INDEX

If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.

160

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Identifier with
Duplicates

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Duplicate
Waypoints

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Duplicate Message

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AIRPORTS

Figure 5-32 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be

aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.

AFCS

The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the
Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO softkey until INFO-1 is displayed.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

161

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Airport Information

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport

- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)

Runway Information

- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Airport/Runway
Diagram

COM/NAV Freq. Info.

- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information

Softkeys

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-33 Airport Information Page

The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)

AFCS

• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
Airport Directory
Information

Airport Information

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region

Softkeys
Figure 5-34 Airport Directory Page Example

162

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The airport directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the INFO softkey
until INFO-2 is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available) on the
Airport Directory Page:

• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter

• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service

• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number

• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers

• Notes: Airport Notes
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available

• Instrument
Approaches:
Published
Approach,
Frequency
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Frequencies: Type/Frequency

• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport

EIS

• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation

• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
3) Press the ENT Key.

AFCS

4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.

Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.

APPENDICES

Viewing a destination airport:
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

163

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance

Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC

* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The G1000 provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a list
of up to 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
Bearing/Distance to Airport

AFCS

Airport Identifier/
Type

Approach Available
Length of Longest
Runway

COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)

NRST Softkey

INDEX

Figure 5-35 Nearest Airports Window on PFD

164

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing
the ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list.
Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest
Airports list.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility

Airport Information
Airport Information

EIS

- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region

- Lat/Long

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-36 Airport Information Window on PFD

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to three frequencies,
and up to three approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

165

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map Showing Nearest Airport

Nearest Airport

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Nearest Airports

- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance

Airport Information
EIS

- Facility/City/Elevation

Runway Information
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency

Approaches Available

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
Window Selection Softkeys

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-37 Nearest Airport Page

Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the NRST Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.

Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:

APPENDICES

1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.

INDEX

3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

166

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.

EIS

The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT, WATER).
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.

AFCS

4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Nearest Airport Criteria

INDEX

- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length

Figure 5-38 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

167

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

INTERSECTIONS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.

EIS

Selected Intersection

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Intersection Identifier
Intersection Info

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- Region
- Lat/Long

Nearest VOR Info

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR

AFCS

Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-39 Intersection Information Page

Selecting an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.

INDEX

3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

168

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to eleven Intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed.
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Navigation Map Showing Nearest Intersection

EIS

Nearest Intersection

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Intersection Information

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position

Intersection Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Reference VOR Info

- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR

AFCS

Figure 5-40 Nearest Intersections Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

169

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

NDBS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT’.
Selected NDB

Navigation Map Showing Selected NDB

NDB Identifier/Type
EIS

- Facility Name
- Nearest City

NDB Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long

NDB Frequency

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Nearest Airport Info

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport

AFCS

Figure 5-41 NDB Information Page

NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
Selecting an NDB:

APPENDICES

1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob

INDEX

2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

170

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.

Navigation Map Showing Selected NDB

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
Nearest NDB

EIS

NDB Identifier/Symbol

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

NDB Information

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long

NDB Frequency

AFCS

Figure 5-42 Nearest NDB Page

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

171

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

VORS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information
cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is
listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.

EIS

Selected VOR

Navigation Map Showing Selected VOR

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City

VOR Information

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long

VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-43 VOR Information Page

The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL.
Selecting a VOR:

APPENDICES

1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

INDEX

Or:

172

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.

EIS

4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.

Nearest VOR

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to eleven VORs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
Navigation Map Showing Nearest VOR

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

VOR Identifier/Symbol

- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

VOR Information

- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long

APPENDICES

VOR Frequency

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

Figure 5-44 Nearest VOR Page

173

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

USER WAYPOINTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G1000 can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from an
existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or latitude and longitude. Once a waypoint has been
created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system power down.
Navigation Map Showing Selected User Waypoint

EIS

Selected User Waypoint

User Waypoint Info

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type

User Wpt Comment
Reference Wpt Info

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- Identifier
- Radial/Distance

User Waypoint List

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Identifier
- Comment

# User Wpts Used

AFCS

Softkeys
Figure 5-45 User Waypoint Information Page

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest User Waypoints Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.

INDEX

3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

174

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Navigation Map Showing Selected User Waypoint

Selected User Waypoint

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Nearest User Wpt List

- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long

Reference Wpt Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- Identifier
- Radial/Distance

Figure 5-46 Nearest User Waypoint Page

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:

AFCS

1) Press the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.

APPENDICES

Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.

175

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).

EIS

3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and pressing the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

INDEX

Figure 5-47 User Waypoint Information Page Menu

176

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing

the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.

EIS

3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name. The first reference waypoint box is highlighted.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

AFCS

9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.

EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List, if required, and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

177

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Renaming user waypoints:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

2) Enter a new name.

1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Press the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

EIS

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.

AFCS

The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

APPENDICES

4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.

178

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:

EIS

1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.

Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

179

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.4 AIRSPACES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G1000 can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).

Class D Airspace

EIS

MOA (Military)

Class B Airspace

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Restricted Area

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

TFR

Alert Area

AFCS

Class C Airspace

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

ADIZ

APPENDICES

Warning Area

Figure 5-48 Airspaces

INDEX

The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.

180

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:

EIS

1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Airspace Alerts Box

- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)

APPENDICES
INDEX

DFLTS Softkey
Figure 5-49 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

181

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu. See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace
area.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, ‘VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
Airspace 2

Airspace 3

EIS

Airspace 1

Airspace Alerts Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency

Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Associated Frequencies
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency

Softkeys
AFCS

Figure 5-50 Nearest Airspaces Page

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:

APPENDICES

1) Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.
2) Press the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
3) Select the desired airspace.

INDEX

4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

182

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Pressing the PFD MSG Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.

EIS

Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near –
less than 2 nm.

Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

183

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the G1000 establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.

EIS

A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.

Direct-to Point Info

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City

VNV Constraints

- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Map of Selected Point

Location of Destination
AFCS

- Bearing/Distance

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Desired Course

APPENDICES

Figure 5-51 Direct-to Window - MFD

Direct-to Point Info

- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name

VNV Constraints

- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset

Direct-to Point Info

INDEX

- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course

Activation Command
Figure 5-52 Direct-to Window - PFD

184

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).

EIS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-53 Waypoint Submenu

Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
AFCS

1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.

APPENDICES

Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.

INDEX

4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

185

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints (the FPL list is populated only
when navigating a flight plan, and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints.
EIS

4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.

Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
AFCS

1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page and press the
FMS Knob.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.

APPENDICES

Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:

INDEX

1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.

186

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.

Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.

EIS

3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the G1000 resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Page Menu

- Cancel Direct-To Navigation

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 5-54 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When navigating a direct-to, the G1000 sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.

APPENDICES

Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course.

INDEX

4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

187

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.

EIS

A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint,
or at the specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior
to the direct-to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of the direct-to.
All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on Vertical Navigation for more
information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

9) Press the ENT Key to activate.

188

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

EIS

Page Menu

- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-55 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

189

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Flight planning on the G1000 consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The G1000 allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type

Symbol

EIS

Active non-heading Leg

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Active heading Leg
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Heading Leg not in the current flight segment
Non-heading Leg not in the active flight segment

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Turn Anticipation Arc

Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the G1000 uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the G1000 automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.

190

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.

EIS

• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.

FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
Non-Active, Flight Plan Leg

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active Flight Plan Leg

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Active FPL Waypoint List

- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Turn Anticipation Arc
Vertical Navigation Profile

APPENDICES

- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Deviation

Figure 5-56 Active Flight Plan Page

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

191

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Active Flight Plan Comment

Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List

EIS

- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-57 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD

Catalog Contents

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

- # Used
- # Empty

Flight Plan List
- Comment

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Selected Flight Plan Map

Selected FPL Info

AFCS

- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude

Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-58 Flight Plan Catalog Page

INDEX

APPENDICES

The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the G1000 is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).

192

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.

EIS

5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Press the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.

AFCS

7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

193

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.

EIS

6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.

If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Or:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.

Import/Export Softkeys

List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File

Import Successful

INDEX

Figure 5-59 Flight Plan Import

194

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.

EIS

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Import/Export Softkeys

Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name

Export Successful

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

Figure 5-60 Flight Plan Export

195

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans
are limited to 99 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints
in the flight plan exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.

Stored Flight Plan Selected

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint

Softkeys

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 5-61 Stored Flight Plan Page

INDEX

APPENDICES

Flight Plan Full Message

Figure 5-62 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full

196

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.

EIS

5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 5-63 Duplicate Waypoints Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).

APPENDICES

3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).

INDEX

5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

197

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

2) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.

1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.

ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The G1000 also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Airway Waypoint Sequence

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Preview of Selected Airway

Figure 5-64 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway

APPENDICES

Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).

INDEX

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.

198

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Airway Exit Points
Available
Preview of
Selected Airway

AFCS

Figure 5-65 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

199

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Inserted Airway Header

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-66 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted

RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.

AFCS

• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the G1000 database.

INDEX

APPENDICES

The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.

200

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G1000 allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.

Flight Plan Name

EIS

Flight Plan Waypoint
List
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Softkeys

- New Waypoint
- Load Departure
- Load Arrival
- Load Approach
- Activate Flight Plan

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-67 Stored Flight Plan Page

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

201

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
DEPARTURE (DP)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.

EIS

Departure Airport

Selected Departure

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Departures Available at
KMKC

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Departure Waypoint
Sequence

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Preview of Selected
Departure

Figure 5-68 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure

Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS

1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.

INDEX

7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.

202

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Departure Airport

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selected Departure
Selected Runway
Selected Transition

EIS

Departure Transition Points
Available

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Preview of
Selected Departure
Selected Departure End
Point

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-69 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Inserted Departure Header

- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-70 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

203

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ARRIVAL (STAR)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.

EIS

Destination Airport
Selected Arrival

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Arrivals Available at KCOS
Selected Runway

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Arrival Waypoint Sequence

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Preview of
Selected Arrival

Figure 5-71 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival

Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.

INDEX

7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.

204

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Destination Airport

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
DBRY1

EIS

Arrival Waypoint Sequence

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Preview of
Selected Arrival

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-72 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Inserted Arrival Header

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)

APPENDICES

Figure 5-73 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

205

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
APPROACH (APPR)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.

EIS

Destination Airport

Selected Approach
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Approaches Available at
KCOS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Barometric Minimum

Approach Waypoint
Sequence

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Preview of
Selected
Approach
Figure 5-74 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach

Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to
the APPROACH CHANNEL field.

INDEX

b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.

206

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Destination Airport

EIS

Selected Approach
Selected Transition

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Preview of Selected
Approach
Load Approach?

Figure 5-75 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Inserted Approach Header

- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAVGPS 35R LPV)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-76 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

207

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G1000 can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the G1000 is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

EIS

3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.

Flight Plan Name
(Comment)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Selected Flight Plan

AFCS

Preview of Selected
Flight Plan

Stored Flight Plan Info
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude

APPENDICES

Figure 5-77 Stored Flight Plan Information

Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys

Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.

INDEX

2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

208

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.

EIS

3) Press the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
The G1000 allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.

AFCS

Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.

APPENDICES

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the G1000 memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:

INDEX

1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

209

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Press the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.

Deleting all stored flight plans:

EIS

1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT PLAN EDITING

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.

DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The G1000 allows deletion of an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by
the G1000.
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).

AFCS

2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS

APPENDICES

Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:

INDEX

Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’

3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

210

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove ?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

EIS

Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove from flight plan?’ window is displayed.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove ’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

AFCS

Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.

APPENDICES

5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

211

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove ?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

AFCS

8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

APPENDICES

5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove ’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

INDEX

8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

212

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.

EIS

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Changing a stored flight plan comment:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

ALONG TRACK OFFSETS

AFCS

A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

213

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Along Track Offset
Waypoint and Distance
from Flight Plan Waypoint

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance

Figure 5-78 Along Track Offset

Entering an along track offset distance:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

AFCS

3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

214

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PARALLEL TRACK

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Selecting Parallel Track

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-79 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track

Activating parallel track:
AFCS

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.

APPENDICES

5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

215

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Offset Direction
Offset Distance

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Activation Prompt

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-80 Parallel Track Window

Original Track

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Parallel Track
Parallel Track Waypoints

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the active flight plan
from the current position on
(will not affect an approach)

Figure 5-81 Parallel Track Active

INDEX

If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions

216

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Subdued Prompt
EIS

(Unavailable)

Unavailable Status

Invalid
Geometry

Approach
Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-82 Parallel Track Unavailable

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)

Cancel Prompt

AFCS

Active Status

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-83 Cancelling Parallel Track

APPENDICES

Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

3) Press the ENT Key.

217

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Activating a flight plan leg:

The G1000 allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).

EIS

3) Press the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Current
Active Leg

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Selected Destination
Waypoint

Activate Leg Softkey

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 5-84 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint

218

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

New Active
Flight Plan Leg

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Confirmation Window
Figure 5-85 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.

AFCS

4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.

Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

APPENDICES

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

219

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.

EIS

2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-86 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance

APPENDICES

Switching between wide and narrow view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.

INDEX

4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.

220

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Active Flight Plan Narrow View

Active Flight Plan Wide View

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

NARROW Softkey,

LEG-LEG Softkey,

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

WIDE Softkey,

CUM Softkey

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-87 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View

COLLAPSING AIRWAYS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The G1000 allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.

AFCS

The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Q3.FEPOT Airway

Collapsed View
Expanded View

APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 5-88 Expanded/Collapsed Airways

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

221

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.

CLOSEST POINT OF FPL

EIS

‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The G1000 displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.

USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).

AFCS

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears with
the course field highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

10) Press the ENT Key while ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted to add the hold into the flight plan.

222

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Waypoint
Selected
Hold At
Waypoint
Menu
Selection

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course

Course Direction

(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)

(TIME or DIST))

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Leg Length Mode Button

Leg Length

(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)

Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Map of Hold Location

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Expect Further Clearance Time

APPENDICES

Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
Figure 5-89 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

223

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears
with the course field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.

EIS

6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

9) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint at the aircraft
present position and activate the hold.

Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘HOLD?’ instead of ‘ACTIVATE?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

8) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to wayoint is part of the active flight plan, the HOLD is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)

Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:

Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.

APPENDICES

Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the HOLD waypoint.

INDEX

3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.

224

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the DIRECT TO Window (PFD or MFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Hold At
Present
Position
Menu
Selection

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course

Course Direction

Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)

Leg Length

(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)

Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)

AFCS

Map of Hold Location
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Expect Further Clearance Time
INDEX

Activate Hold
Figure 5-90 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

225

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

EIS

Waypoint
Selected

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction

(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Leg Length

(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)

Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Map of Hold Location

Expect Further
Clearance Time

APPENDICES

Hold At Direct To
Waypoint selection

Load Hold and
Activate Direct To

INDEX

Figure 5-91 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint

226

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: The G1000 supports vertical navigation for all lateral leg types except for CA, CI, FA, FM, HA, HM, PI,

VA, VD, VI, VR, and VM. Vertical constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.

Current Vertical Navigation Profile

EIS

The G1000 system Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute
and teminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile

Disabled (fields dashed)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Enabled (valid data)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

ENBL VNV Softkey

CNCL VNV Softkey

Figure 5-92 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.

APPENDICES

2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).

Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.

INDEX

2) Press the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

227

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

The G1000 allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile

Current Vertical Navigation Profile

Prior to VNV Direct-to

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

After VNV Direct-to

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

VNV Direct-To Softkey

VNV PROF Softkey

Figure 5-93 Vertical Navigation Direct-To

Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:

APPENDICES

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (light blue number) to be used. If

INDEX

not, the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.

228

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

3) Press the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.

EIS

2) Press the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The G1000 system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Displayed Text
Examples

Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft

Large White Text
AFCS

Large Light Blue Text

Cross AT
2,300 ft

Small Light Blue Text
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft

Small Light Blue
Subdued Text

Altitude Constraint
Examples

Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar

APPENDICES

Figure 5-94 Waypoint Altitude Constraints

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

229

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

White Text

Light Blue Text

Light Blue Subdued Text

Large Altitude calculated by the system
Text estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.

Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.

The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.

Small
Text

Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.

The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.

Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.

Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Altitudes associated with approach procedures are “not-designated”. This means the system will not
automatically use the altitudes loaded with the approach for giving vertical speed and deviation guidance. Note
that these altitudes are displayed as white text up to, but not including, the FAF. The FAF is always a “reference
only” altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance. In
this case, the FAF altitude can be designated.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Altitudes that have not been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “designated” using the ENT
Key. The altitude can now be used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed altitudes may change due to recalculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude to a designated altitude.
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.

AFCS

Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.

Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:

APPENDICES

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.

INDEX

Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the G1000 allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
230

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.

EIS

Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the G1000 displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The G1000 also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:

AFCS

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.

Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.

APPENDICES

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).

231

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS

Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

232

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5.8 PROCEDURES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G1000 can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.

EIS

The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

DEPARTURES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.

LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.

AFCS

4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

233

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Departure Airport

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Available Procedure Actions

Loaded Procedures

Departure Preview

Departure Choices

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-95 Departure Selection

Loaded Departure

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Selected Departure

Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 5-96 Departure Loading

234

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Viewing available departures at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.

EIS

5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-x Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.

REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:

AFCS

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

235

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

ARRIVALS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.

LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:

EIS

1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.

7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.

5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Destination Airport

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Available Procedure Actions

APPENDICES

Loaded Procedures

Arrival Preview

Arrival Choices

INDEX

Figure 5-97 Arrival Selection

236

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Selected Arrival

Loaded Arrival

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-98 Arrival Loading

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.

AFCS

5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-x Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

237

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.

EIS

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

APPROACHES

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures

for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.

AFCS

An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the
procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.

INDEX

When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
The SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LP, and LPV approaches according to the published
chart. LNAV+V is a standard LNAV approach with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance in
238

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed
on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where
LNAV+V is indicated by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach type
is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Example on HSI

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Approach Type

- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
GPS approach using published LNAV minima.
Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV
(available only if minima (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS
SBAS available) unavailable)
LP
GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
LP+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided
SBAS available) (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LPV
GPS approach using published LPV minima
(available only if
SBAS available)
Table 5-9 Approach Types

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.

AFCS

2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

APPENDICES

b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
5) Minimums

INDEX

a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the
temperature, and press the ENT Key.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

239

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

6) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED

FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Destination Airport

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Available Procedure Actions

Loaded Procedures

Approach Preview

Approach Choices

AFCS

Figure 5-99 Approach Selection
Loaded Approach

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Selected Approach

Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys

LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-100 Approach Loading

240

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Viewing available approaches at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the APR Softkey. The Approach
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.

EIS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Minimums box. The approach is previewed on the map.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select minimums on or off. Press the ENT Key.
a) When minimums are selected on, the cursor moves to the minimum altitude field . Use the small FMS Knob to
select the altitude. Press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

b) If temperature compensated minimums was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Use the small
FMS Knob to select the temperature. Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach
is previewed on the map.
Or:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

a) When minimums are selected off, the cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the INFO-1 or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.

Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.

AFCS

2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

7) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the
temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

241

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
a) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.

ACTIVATING AN APPROACH

EIS

A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.

In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.

AFCS

2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.

REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).

APPENDICES

2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:

INDEX

1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.

242

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.

EIS

3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Press the Go-Around Button.

TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If desired, the system can compensate the loaded approach altitudes based on a pilot-supplied temperature
at the destination. For example, if the pilot enters a destination temperature of -40º C, the system increases
the approach altitudes accordingly. A temperature compensated altitude is displayed in slanted text.
Activating temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the . The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.

AFCS

NOTE: The temperature at the destination can be entered in the TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

on the MFD, or in the REFERENCES Window on the PFD. There is only one compensation temperature for
the system, therefore, changing the temperature will affect both the loaded approach altitudes and the
minimums. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for information about applying temperature compensation
to the MDA/DH.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

243

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

Selected
Temperature
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Temperature
Compensation
Selected

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-101 Temperature Compensation

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

ACTIVATE
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted

CANCEL
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 5-102 Activating/Cancelling Temperature Compensation

APPENDICES

Compensated
Altitudes

Uncompensated
Altitudes

Figure 5-103 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan

Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
INDEX

1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.

244

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘CANCEL COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitudes for the approach are cancelled.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Activating/cancelling temperature compensation for the loaded approach altitudes does not select/

deselect temperature compensated minimums (MDA/DH), nor does selecting/deselecting temperature
compensated minimums activate/cancel temperature compensated approach altitudes.

COURSE TO ALTITUDE
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for
this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is
reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Course to Altitude Leg

APPENDICES

Figure 5-104 Course to Altitude

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

245

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

5.9 TRIP PLANNING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The G1000 allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining fuel).

TRIP PLANNING

EIS

All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg

Trip Planning Page Mode

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg

- Automatic/Manual

Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature

Trip Statistics

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -

Other Statistics

- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)

Fuel Statistics

AFCS

Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -

Softkeys

- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-105 Trip Planning Page

The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:

APPENDICES

• Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.

INDEX

• Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.

246

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.

EIS

In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.

AFCS

- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA
is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current leg
being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to the
selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight
plan was selected.

APPENDICES

• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

247

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL STATISTICS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.

EIS

• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by taking the time
of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.

OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).

AFCS

Selected Flight Plan NN -

Selected Leg(s)

00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment

Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg

APPENDICES

Figure 5-106 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan

Selected Leg(s)

Not Available

INDEX

Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-107 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode

248

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Selecting automatic or manual page mode:

Press the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:

Press the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.

Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EIS

1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.

Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Press the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.

In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:

AFCS

1) Press the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

249

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

WEIGHT PLANNING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the data is done on the Weight and Fuel
Planning Page located in the AUX Page Group.
NOTE: All weight planning data fields display data rounded to the nearest 10 pounds.

A/C Payload Calculator

Fuel Weight Calculator

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Basic Empty Weight Entry Pilot & Stores Weight Entry Basic Operating Weight Calc. Passenger(s) Weight Entry Cargo Weight Entry Zero Fuel Weight Calculation -

- Zero Fuel Weight Calculation
- Fuel on Board Entry
- Aircraft Weight Calculation
- Est. Landing Weight Calculation
- Estimated Landing Fuel Calculation
- Fuel Reserve Entry
- Excess Fuel Calculation

Empty Weight Softkey

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

(selects Basic Empty
Weight)

Figure 5-108 Weight Planning Page

Entering basic empty weight:

AFCS

1) Select the EMPTY WT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set Basic Empty Weight’, and press the ENT
Key to select the ‘BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the basic empty weight.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Entering a pilot and stores weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘PILOT AND STORES’ field.

APPENDICES

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the pilot and stores weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

INDEX

The basic operating weight is calculated by adding the basic empty weight and the pilot and stores weight.

250

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Entering the number of passengers:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘PASSENGERS #’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the number of passengers.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Entering the average passenger weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the passenger weight field.

EIS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the average passenger weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

The total weight of passengers is calculated by multiplying the number of passengers by the average passenger
weight.
Entering the cargo weight:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘CARGO’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the cargo weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

The ‘ZERO FUEL WEIGHT’ is calculated by adding the basic empty, pilot and stores, passenger, and cargo
weights.
Entering a fuel on board weight:

AFCS

1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘FUEL ON BOARD’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel on board.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.

Entering fuel reserve:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘FUEL RESERVES’ field.

APPENDICES

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel reserves amount.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

251

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

When the aircraft is in the air and a destination waypoint has been entered, the fuel calculations can be
completed.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

• Estimated landing fuel weight = fuel on board weight - (fuel flow x ETE)

• Estimated landing weight = zero fuel weight + estimated landing fuel weight.
• Excess fuel weight = estimated landing fuel weight - fuel reserves weight
If the aircraft is on the ground or a destination waypoint has not been entered, the following fields display
invalid values consisting of six dashes:

EIS

• Estimated landing weight
• Estimated landing fuel weight
• Excess fuel weight
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

WEIGHT CAUTION AND WARNING CONDITIONS
If the zero fuel weight is greater than the maximum allowable zero fuel weight, then the zero fuel weight is
displayed in yellow.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If the aircraft weight is greater than the maximum allowable takeoff weight, then the aircraft weight is displayed
in yellow.
If the estimated landing weight is greater than the maximum allowable landing weight, then the estimated
landing weight is displayed in yellow.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

If the estimated landing fuel weight is positive, but less than or equal to the fuel reserves weight, the following
values are displayed in yellow:
• Estimated fuel at landing weight
• Excess fuel weight

AFCS

If the estimated landing fuel weight is zero or negative, then the following values are displayed in red:
• Estimated fuel at landing weight

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Excess fuel weight

252

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5.10 RAIM PREDICTION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over SBAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

RAIM PREDICTION Box

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status

AFCS

RAIM Softkey
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
Figure 5-109 RAIM Prediction

APPENDICES

Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

253

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.

Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.

EIS

2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.

• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.

• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.

254

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

RAIM Softkey
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
Figure 5-110 SBAS Display - Active

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the SBAS softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.

AFCS

4) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

255

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable

RAIM Softkey

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)

SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-111 SBAS Display - Inactive

256

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5.11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the SBAS capable GPS system while the
G1000 provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted

should be considered not current.

EIS

The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-112 indicating the
active departure leg.

After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Figure 5-112 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-112 Assigned Heading of 240º

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

257

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-113.

Figure 5-113 Assigned Heading of 290º

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

258

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight
plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-114. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is placed
immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-114 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan

c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for V4,
Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-115.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-115 Entering V4 Entry Point

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

259

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-116.

Figure 5-116 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-116, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

f) Press the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-117.

APPENDICES

Figure 5-117 List of Available Airways for TOP

INDEX

g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-117.

260

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-118.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-118 List of Available Exits for V4

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

i) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-118.
j) Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-119.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-119 Ready to Load V4

k) Press the ENT Key.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

261

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

l) V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-120.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-120 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan

5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ULNAZ. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the leg.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

c) Press the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-121. Note the TOP to
ULNAZ leg is actually part of V4.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-121 Comfirm Active Leg

262

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-122, the magenta arrow in
the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note the
phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active. Since a
leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed
to 2.0 nm.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-122 V4 Now Active Leg

6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

263

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-123.

Figure 5-123 Turn on to Active Leg

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-124.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 5-124 Turn to Intercept V244

264

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

9) As seen in Figure 5-125, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-125 V244 Now Active Leg

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

265

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-126.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-126 HYS to LAA Leg Active

11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-127.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

c) Press the Direct-to (

INDEX

Figure 5-127 Direct To OPSHN

266

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-128.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-128 Enter VNV Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-129.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-129 Enter VNV Offset Distance

g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three miles
prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the G1000 gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an
altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

267

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-130, the magenta arrow indicating the
direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset
distance and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure
have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a
track along the magenta line to OPSHN.

Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the CDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

that will be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired
altitude, then pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as light blue meaning it will be used by
the system to determine vertical speed and deviation guidance.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-130 Direct-to Active

12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.

INDEX

APPENDICES

a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.

268

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-131.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-131 Procedures Window

c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-132.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-132 List of Available Approaches

d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-132.
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

269

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-133.

Figure 5-133 List of Available Transitions

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK is
used.
g) Press the ENT Key.
h) Barometric Minimums (Figure 5-134)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small
FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
Or:

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.

270

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-134 Barometric Minimums Set

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

i) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen
in Figure 5-135.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-135 Loaded Approach

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

271

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-136. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as white text, indicating these values are “not
designated” for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Note: To use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the ENT Key.
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.

EIS

After making the altitude “designated”, it is displayed as light blue text.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-136.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the WAAS GPS
altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-136 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF

272

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

a) Press the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-137.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS Knob
to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.

EIS

Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of
10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 5-137 Adjusting the Descent

c) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

273

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

15) As seen in Figure 5-138, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-139. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-139, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-138 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)

AFCS

Target Altitude

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)

APPENDICES

Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)

INDEX

Figure 5-139 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)

274

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-140.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

Keep Vertical Deviation
Pointer Centered
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 5-140 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-141.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-141 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

275

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-142. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-142 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg

276

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-143. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-143 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-144). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
A descent to HABUK is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

277

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

INDEX

Figure 5-144 Approaching PYNON

278

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-145).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-145 Approach is Now Active

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Note: To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-146.
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 5-146 Manually Activate Approach

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

279

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-147 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)

280

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly and is
used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to
the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-148) when the final approach course becomes active.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 5-148 Descending to the FAF

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-148.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

281

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-149.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 5-149 Descending to the Missed Approach Point

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is not part
of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along the runway
centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude
is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In
this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to
is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is reached. After reaching
6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is
above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix (MOGAL) to
begin the missed approach procedure.

INDEX

APPENDICES

In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure. For
example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold
Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the aircraft
altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the
missed approach procedure is activated.

282

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD to resume automatic waypoint sequencing
through the missed approach procedure.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-150.
The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the HSI.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 5-150 Missed Approach Active
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

283

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern is established at
the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-151.

Figure 5-151 Establishing the Holding Pattern

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-152.

INDEX

Figure 5-152 Hold Established

284

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other

phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the G1000
stops using GPS.

EIS

While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the G1000 detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the G1000
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the G1000 in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed by the G1000 through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available
should not be used for navigation.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

DR Mode is indicated on the G1000 by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in yellow over the
‘own aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-153. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI
slightly above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-153. The CDI deviation
bar remains, but is removed from the display after 20 minutes in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled
in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available (20 min.) Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’
alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once
a valid GPS solution is restored.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-153.
Also, while the G1000 is in DR Mode, both TAWS and Terrain Proximity are disabled. Additionally, the accuracy
of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to
function, but with degraded accuracy.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

285

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT MANAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Distance &
Bearing

EIS

Current
Track
Indicator

Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion

Wind Data

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

GPS Navigation
Lost Message
Course Deviation
Indicator

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Nav Data Bar

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

All data except
Active Leg,
TAS, and DTK
are in yellow

AFCS

Dead Reckoning
Annunciation

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Subdued Aircraft
Symbol

Figure 5-153 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow

INDEX

NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,

or when a 65° bank angle is reached.

286

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

G1000 hazard avoidance features provide situational awareness and advisory information with regard to
potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69A SiriusXM Weather (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Proximity

EIS

• Terrain-SVS (Standard with SVS Option)
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class-B (TAWS-B) (Optional)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Traffic
• Traffic Information Service (TIS)
• Garmin GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

287

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.1 SIRIUSXM WEATHER

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous

EIS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The GDL 69/69A is a remote-mounted data link satellite receiver. It provides SiriusXM Weather data to the
system. The Multi Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Navigation Map display
the graphical weather information and the associated text. The GDL 69A can also receive SiriusXM Satellite
Radio entertainment services. Both weather data and audio entertainment programming operate in the S-band
frequency range to provide continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Services from SiriusXM require subscriptions. For more information on specific service packages, visit www.
siriusxm.com.

ACTIVATING SERVICES

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Before SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio can be used, the services must be activated by providing
SiriusXM the coded IDs unique to the installed GDL 69/69A. SiriusXM Satellite Radio (audio) and SiriusXM
Weather (data) services each have coded IDs. The Audio and Data Radio IDs must be provided to activate the
weather service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are located on:
• The AUX - XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)

AFCS

• The GDL69 Series Satellite Weather Activation Instructions included with the unit (P/N 190-00355-06)
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to provide weather data and/
or audio entertainment programming through the GDL 69/69A.
Activating SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:

APPENDICES

1) Contact SiriusXM by the customer service phone number listed on its website, www.siriusxm.com. Follow the
instructions provided by SiriusXM customer service.
2) Select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
4) Verify that the desired services are activated.

INDEX

5) Press the LOCK Softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
7) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.

288

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather

Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)

EIS

Figure 6-1 XM Information Page

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Select to Display XM
Information page

Select to Lock
Subscription
Information

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

USING SIRIUSXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
The principal map for viewing SiriusXM Weather data is the Map - Weather Data Link (XM) Page. This is the
only map display capable of showing information for all available SiriusXM Weather products.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Viewing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.

AFCS

NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled Icon
NEXRAD Weather
Product Ages (US
& Canada)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

190-01461-01 Rev. A

INDEX

NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display

Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link (XM) Page

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

289

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

For each enabled SiriusXM Weather product which can be shown as a map overlay, the system displays a
weather product icon and product age. The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since the weather data
provider compiled the weather product. The product age display does not indicate the age of the information
contained within the weather product, which can be significantly older than the displayed weather product age.

EIS

The SiriusXM Weather service broadcasts weather information at specific intervals (defined in the Broadcast
Rate column in Table 6-1). If for any reason, a product is not refreshed within the Broadcast Rate intervals
(see Table 6-1), the system removes the expired data from the display, and shows dashes instead of the product
age. This ensures the displayed information is consistent with what is currently being transmitted by the
SiriusXM Weather service. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
changes to yellow. If data for a weather product is not available, the system displays ‘N/A’ next to the weather
product symbol instead of the product age.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not
contain updated weather products. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated
or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. SiriusXM and its weather data suppliers define and control
the data update intervals, which are subject to change.

290

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Symbol

Expiration Time Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
(Minutes)
5 (U.S.)
30
10 (Canada)

Cell Movement

SIGMETs/AIRMETs

Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METAR)

City Forecast

Surface Analysis

Freezing Levels

Winds Aloft

County Warnings

Cyclone Warnings

Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)

180

no product image

Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPS)
Air Report
(AIREPS)
Turbulence
No Radar Coverage
Temporary Flight Restrictions
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
(TAFs)

INDEX

APPENDICES

SiriusXM Lightning

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

7.5

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Echo Top

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Cloud Top

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SiriusXM Weather Product

Table 6-1 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

291

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Cloud Top (CLD TOP)

Echo Top (ECHO TOP)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Cell Movement (CELL MOV)

+
+

City Forecast (CITY)

Surface Analysis (SFC)

Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)

Winds Aloft (WIND)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

METARs

AFCS

SiriusXM Lightning (XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)

County Warnings (COUNTY)

Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)

Icing Potential (ICNG)

PIREPs

AIREPs

Turbulence (TURB)

TFRs

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Flight Plan Pages

Nearest Page Group

Weather Data Link
(XM) Page

AUX - Trip Planning
Page

Navigation Map Page

NEXRAD and No Radar Coverage

Weather Information
Page

SiriusXM Weather Product

PFD Inset Map

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Table 6-2 shows which SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.

TAFs

* Winds Aloft Data displayed inside Profile View on the Navigation Map Page.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Table 6-2 SiriusXM Weather Product Display Maps

292

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map. Figure 6-3
shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (XM) Page. When a weather product is selected
for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled.

CYCLONE SFC OFF

FRZ LVL

SIG/AIR

METAR

LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST

WIND OFF ICNG OFF TURB OFF AIREPS

PIREPS

COUNTY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NEXRAD ECHO TOP CLD TOP XM LTNG CELL MOV

ENGINE

BACK

SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
CURRENT

12 HR

24 HR

36 HR

48 HR

LEGEND

BACK

EIS

OFF

Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.

3000

6000

9000

12000

15000

LEGEND

BACK

OFF

18000

21000

24000

27000

30000

33000

LEGEND

BACK

OFF

36000

39000

42000

LEGEND

BACK

OFF

1000

3000

6000

9000

12000

LEGEND

BACK

OFF

18000

21000

24000

27000

30000

LEGEND

BACK

OFF

21000

24000

27000

30000

33000

LEGEND

BACK

OFF

39000

42000

45000

LEGEND

BACK

15000

36000

AFCS

SFC

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

OFF

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 6-3 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Softkeys

APPENDICES

The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (XM) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide the ability to enable/disable the display of weather products, equivalent to using the softkeys to
enable/disable the display of weather products.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

If the selected map range is less than 10 nm, the system automatically removes the weather products from the
map, with the exception of METARS, which remain displayed when METARs are enabled.

293

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-4).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’ or ‘PRODUCT GROUP 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure
6-5).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
EIS

6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the changed settings.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Menu

Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Setup Menu

Restoring default Weather Data Link (XM) Page settings:

APPENDICES

1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

INDEX

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘PRODUCT GROUP 1’ or ‘PRODUCT GROUP 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure
6-5).

294

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

5) If restoring an individual weather product setting to its default value, turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
desired field to restore.
6) Press the MENU Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

7) Turn the large FMS Knob if needed to highlight ‘Restore Selection Default’ (to restore only the highlighted field)
or ‘Restore All Defaults’ (to restore all products within the selected product group to their default settings), and
press the ENT Key.

Weather products displayed on maps other than the Weather Data Link (XM) Page use settings based on those
selected for the Navigation Map Page.

EIS

Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-6).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-8).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 6-6 Navigation Map Page Menu

APPENDICES

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu

295

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The system displays legends for weather products enabled on the Navigation Map and the Weather Data Link
(XM) Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page):
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the enabled weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
EIS

b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) To remove the XM Weather Legends Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the
FMS Knob.

Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Navigation Map Page):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the LEGEND Softkey (available if one or more SiriusXM Weather products are enabled for display).
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Additional information about the following SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed by panning the map
pointer over the displayed products on the map:
• Echo Tops

• METARs

• Cell Movement

• County Warnings

• SIGMETs

• TFRs

AFCS

• AIRMETs

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning the
RANGE Knob. If adjusting the map range while panning is enabled, the map re-centers on the Map Pointer.

296

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Severe
Thunderstorm
Warning Selected
with Map Pointer

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-9 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

297

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
NOTE: NEXRAD data cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain, echo tops, turbulence, or icing data

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

is displayed.
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated refresh time for the NEXRAD weather product.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.

INDEX

Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page

298

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.

The weather product displays composite information from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States.
This information is composed of the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display
of the information is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be
viewed on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-11), press the LEGEND
Softkey when NEXRAD is enabled for display.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data with Legend

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in a gray shade of purple (Figure 6-11).

Reflectivity
AFCS

Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.

APPENDICES

The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

299

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.

EIS

• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-12).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• If the precipitation type is unknown, the system displays the precipitation as rain, regardless of actual
precipitation type.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Block Area is 4 km2
at 30 NM map
range

Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Weather Product with 30 NM Map Range

The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:

APPENDICES

• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows

INDEX

• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans

300

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed precipitation, regardless of
actual precipitation type.

EIS

No Coverage
Above 55°N

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
as Mixed

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Weather Product - Canada

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

301

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ECHO TOPS
NOTE: The Echo Tops weather product cannot be displayed simultaneously with Cloud Tops or NEXRAD

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

data.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

The Echo Tops weather product (Figure 6-14) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest
radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the
highest altitude at which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.

AFCS

Figure 6-14 Echo Tops Weather Product

Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the ECHO TOP Softkey.

INDEX

APPENDICES

To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-15), press the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.

No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-15 Echo Tops Legend

302

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is enabled. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of purple (Figure 6-15).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.

The Cloud Tops weather product (Figure 6-16) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite
imagery.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-16 Cloud Tops Weather Product
AFCS

Displaying Cloud Tops information:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the CLD TOP Softkey.

APPENDICES

To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-17), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected
for display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.

INDEX

Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Legend

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

303

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIRIUSXM LIGHTNING

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The SiriusXM Lightning weather product (Figure 6-18) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground
lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact
location of the lightning strike is not displayed.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Lightning
Strikes

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-18 SiriusXM Lightning Weather Product

Displaying SiriusXM Lightning information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.

AFCS

2) Press the XM LTNG Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

To display the SiriusXM Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-19), press the
LEGEND Softkey when SiriusXM Lightning is selected for display.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 6-19 SiriusXM Lightning Legend

304

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

CELL MOVEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Cell Movement weather product (Figure 6-20) shows the location and movement of storm cells as
identified by the ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement
indicated with short, orange arrows.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Storm Cells

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-20 Cell Movement Weather Product

On most applicable maps, Cell Movement information appears with the NEXRAD weather product. On the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement data can be selected independently.
Displaying Cell Movement information:

AFCS

1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page). For Cell Movement to
be displayed on maps other than the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement must be enabled in the
Navigation Map Setup Menu (see “Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page”
procedure).

APPENDICES

To display the Cell Movement legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, (Figure 6-21), press the
LEGEND Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.

Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

305

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The National Weather Service (NWS) issues SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and
AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information) for potentially hazardous weather. The NWS issues a
Convective SIGMET for hazardous convective weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition
occurring at a localized geographical position.

EIS

AIRMET
Mountain
Obscuration

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Convective
SIGMET

Figure 6-22 SIGMET/AIRMET Data

Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.

AFCS

2) Press the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the RANGE Knob and move the Map Pointer over the
icon.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-23 shows sample SIGMET text.

INDEX

APPENDICES

To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-24), press the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.

Figure 6-23 Sample SIGMET Text

306

Figure 6-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.

EIS

METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report. A
colored flag indicates an airport with an available METAR.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Selected Airport

AFCS

Figure 6-25 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.

APPENDICES

METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in
a decoded fashion, then in its original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information is displayed only in its raw form when it is available.
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, press the METAR Softkey.

INDEX

2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

307

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Or:

5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.

EIS

2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note the METAR text must be
completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.

METAR Text for the
Selected Airport

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

METAR Symbol

AFCS

TAF Text for the
Selected Airport

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 6-26 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page

The original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map
page. The METAR text appears in a box near the METAR flag.

INDEX

APPENDICES

In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the
MFD. A solid METAR flag next to a waypoint indicates METAR observations are available corresponding to
a specific waypoint in the flight plan; a hollow METAR flag indicates an off-route METAR near the flight plan
waypoint is available. If METAR text for an off-route waypoint is displayed, the system also provides the
source, distance, and direction of the off-route METAR reporting station in relation to the flight plan waypoint
at the end of the report.

308

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight a waypoint with an associated METAR. The METAR text will appear in the
SELECTED WAYPOINT WEATHER window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.

EIS

To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, press the LEGEND Softkey when
METARs are selected for display.
The content of the METAR determines the METAR flag color. The METAR flag is gray when the METAR
text does not contain adequate information to determine the condition.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-27 METAR Legend

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

309

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Navigation Database

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

service area.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours. Both weather products are enabled together.

Figure 6-28 Current Surface Analysis Data

AFCS

Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the SFC Softkey.
4) Select the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect the forecast time selected.

INDEX

APPENDICES

To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-29), press the LEGEND Softkey when
the Surface Analysis and City Forecast are enabled for display.

Figure 6-29 Surface Analysis Legend

310

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FREEZING LEVELS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the first
isotherm is found (Figure 6-30). If the system has not received data for a given altitude, or the information
is out-of-date, the system does not display information for that altitude.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Data

Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.

AFCS

2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the FRZ LVL Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-31), press the LEGEND Softkey when Freezing Level data
is selected to be displayed.

APPENDICES

Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Legend

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

311

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
WINDS ALOFT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Winds Aloft weather product (Figure 6-32) shows the forecast wind speed and direction at the surface
and at selected altitudes. Altitude can be chosen in 3,000-foot increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet
MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.

EIS

3) Press the WIND Softkey.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet

APPENDICES

To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-33), press the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.

INDEX

Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data with Legend

312

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-34). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Winds Aloft Data Age

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows

Altitude Scale

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-34 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on
Profile View

Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-3.
Tailwind
Symbol

Headwind/Tailwind
Component

None

Less than 5 knots

AFCS

Headwind
Symbol

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

5 knots
10 knots

APPENDICES

50 knots
Table 6-3 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols

Enabling/disabling profile view (containing winds aloft data)
INDEX

1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey/
3) Press the PROFILE Softkey.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

313

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.

Winds Aloft information inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on
the Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:

EIS

1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-35).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Profile’ group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-36).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’ (Figure 6-37).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 6-35 Navigation Map Page Menu

Figure 6-37 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group

INDEX

Figure 6-36 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu

314

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

COUNTY WARNINGS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The County Warning weather product (Figure 6-38) provides specific public awareness and protection
weather warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on severe
thunderstorms, tornadoes, and flood conditions.

EIS

Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Flood
Warning

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-38 County Flood Warning

Displaying County Warning information:
AFCS

1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the COUNTY Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-39), press the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings
are selected to be displayed.

APPENDICES

Figure 6-39 County Warnings Legend
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

315

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CYCLONE

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Cyclone weather product shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes), tropical storms, and
their projected tracks. The system displays the projected track information in the form of DD/HH:MM.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Cyclone

Figure 6-40 Cyclone Weather Product on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the CYCLONE Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-41), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cyclones are selected to be
displayed.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 6-41 Cyclone Legend

316

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ICING (CIP & SLD)
NOTE: The Icing weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as the NEXRAD weather product.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Current Icing Product (CIP) data (Figure 6-42) shows a graphical view of the icing environment. Icing
severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft type). The
CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the analysis.

EIS

Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying the Icing weather product:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through
the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 6-42 Icing Data at 18,000 Feet

To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-43), press the LEGEND Softkey when Icing is enabled for
display.

INDEX

Figure 6-43 Icing Potential Legend

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

317

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TURBULENCE
NOTE: The Turbulence weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as the NEXRAD weather

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

product.
The Turbulence weather product (Figure 6-44) identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude
air mass associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between
21,000 and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
Displaying the Turbulence weather product:

EIS

1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Press the TURB Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.

Figure 6-44 Turbulence Weather Product at 21,000 Feet

INDEX

APPENDICES

To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-45), press the LEGEND Softkey when Turbulence is selected for
display.

Figure 6-45 Turbulence Legend

318

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PIREPS AND AIREPS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) (Figure 6-46) are in-flight weather observations collected from pilots.
When significant weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required
to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing
conditions, wind shear, and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
A similar type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically provide AIREPs.

EIS

Additional
Information for
selected Urgent
PIREP
Routine PIREP

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Urgent Pilot
Selected with
Map Pointer

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AIREP

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-46 PIREPs and AIREPS on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page

Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
AFCS

1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather
report when it is selected.

APPENDICES

5) Press the ENT Key. The system displays PIREP or AIREP text, first displayed in a decoded fashion, followed by
the original text. Note the original PIREP or AIREP text may contain additional information not shown in the
decoded version.
6) To scroll, press the FMS Knob, then turn the large knob to scroll through the text. Press the FMS Knob again
when finished.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

319

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Decoded PIREP Text
Selected Urgent
PIREP

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Original PIREP
Text

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-47 Urgent PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page

To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-48), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs
are enabled for display.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).

AFCS

Figure 6-48 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

TEMPORARY FLIGHT RESTRICTIONS (TFRS)
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.

Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.

APPENDICES

The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues Temporary Flight Restrictions (TFRs) to designate areas
where flight is restricted. TFRs are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security,
law enforcement, natural disasters, airshows, and large sporting events. The FAA may issue TFRs at any time,
and TFR information displayed on the system is only intended to supplement TFR information obtained from
official sources including Flight Service Stations (FSS), and Air Traffic Control facilities.

INDEX

The age of TFR data is not shown; however, if TFR product is not available or has expired, the system
displays ‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left corner of maps on which TFRs can be displayed.

320

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TFR Summary
Information

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 6-49 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page or Navigation Map Page.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
INFORMATION window.

AFCS

5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the INFORMATION window.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 6-50 Full Text for Selected TFR
APPENDICES

The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the
TFR product data is removed from the map.
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

321

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-51).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Aviation’ group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-52).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-53).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (‘Off’ or range settings).
EIS

7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-51 Navigation Map Page Menu

Figure 6-53 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Aviation Group

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 6-52 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu

322

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SIRIUSXM WEATHER ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to
SiriusXM services
• Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver

EIS

For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
Selecting the System Status Page:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the AUX Page Group).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 6-54 LRU Information Window on System Status Page

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

323

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
Message

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

CHECK ANTENNA
NONE
NO SIGNAL

EIS

WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

ACTIVATION REQUIRED
DETECTING ACTIVATION

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

WAITING FOR DATA...

Message Location
XM Information Page - Data Signal
Strength field
XM Information Page - Data Signal
Strength field
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
of page
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
of page
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
of page
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
of page
Weather Data Link (XM) Page - center
of page

Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
SiriusXM subscription is not activated
System is activating SiriusXM subscription(s).
SiriusXM Weather subscription confirmed.
Downloading weather data.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Table 6-4 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Status and Error Messages

324

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

6.2 TERRAIN PROXIMITY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

WARNING: Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is

intended only to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage

area.

EIS

G1000 Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO-C151b certification
standards. It increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) and
obstacles. Do not confuse Terrain Proximity with the optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B
(TAWS-B). TAWS-B is more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not
provide caution or warning annunciations or voice alerts. It only provides color indications on map displays
when terrain and obstacles are within a certain altitude threshold from the aircraft. Although the terrain and
obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS-B uses more sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance
from terrain and obstacles.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.

AFCS

The GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite position.
GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea
level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL altitude
accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude.
It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity
feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.

DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

The symbols and colors in Figure 6-55 and Table 6-5 are used to represent obstacles and aircraft altitude
when the Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display. Terrain Proximity uses black, yellow, and red to
represent terrain information relative to aircraft altitude. The color of each obstacle is associated with the
altitude of the aircraft.
325

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude

Aircraft Altitude

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

100 ft Threshold

1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

EIS

Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

Figure 6-55 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL

Obstacle Location

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Table 6-5 Terrain Proximity Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology

AFCS

The Map - Terrain Proximity Page is the principal map page for viewing Terrain Proximity information.
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• PFD Inset Map

• Trip Planning Page

• Navigation Map Page

• Flight Plan Page

• Terrain Proximity Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page):

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.

When Terrain Proximity is selected on maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page, an icon to indicate the
feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown (Figure 6-59).

APPENDICES

The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.

INDEX

Terrain information can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized
by Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.

326

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20
nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-56).

EIS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-57).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-58).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure 6-56 Navigation Map Page Menu

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 6-57 Navigation Map Page Setup
Menu

Figure 6-58 Navigation Map Page Setup
Menu, Map Group

INDEX

Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning the RANGE
Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

327

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Terrain Display
Enabled Icon

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Terrain Legend

Figure 6-59 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
The Terrain Proximity Page is specialized to show terrain and obstacle data in relation to the aircraft’s
current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can
be displayed for reference.

AFCS

Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are
available relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or
arcs).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Displaying the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page.
3) To change the view,

APPENDICES

a) Press the VIEW Softkey.
b) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.

INDEX

b) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view.

328

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude

Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

EIS

Map Range Rings
Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)

Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-60 Terrain Proximity Page

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude

AFCS

Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

Map Range Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

APPENDICES

Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

Figure 6-61 Terrain Proximity Page (ARC View)

329

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.3 PROFILE VIEW TERRAIN

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The system offers a Profile View of terrain and obstacles relative to the aircraft’s current flight path and altitude
on the Navigation Map Page of the MFD. Profile View does not provide TAWS-B terrain or obstacle caution or
warning annunciations or voice alerts, nor does it display potential impact points inside the Profile View. The
colors and symbols in Figure 6-62 and Table 6-6 are used to represent terrain and obstacles.
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude

Aircraft Altitude

EIS

100 ft Threshold

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

Figure 6-62 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Profile View Terrain

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL

Obstacle Location
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude

AFCS

Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-6 Profile View Obstacle Colors and Symbology

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Enabling/Disabling Profile View on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.

APPENDICES

3) Press the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.

INDEX

b) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.

330

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Enabling/Disabling Profile View Terrain on the Navigation Map (when Profile View is enabled):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MAP Softkey.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the TERRAIN Softkey.

PROFILE VIEW DISPLAY

EIS

When the Profile View is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown
along a vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally
along the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the RANGE Knob, the horizontal distance of the Profile
View is adjusted proportionately to be 1/2 of the Navigation Map range distance down to 1 nm, at which point
Profile View is no longer available (‘PROFILE NOT AVAILABLE’ is displayed). When Navigation Map range
is adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles
from the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the Profile View; only an outline of the terrain
will be displayed in black in the Profile View window. Refer to the Terrain Proximity, Terrain-SVS, or TAWS-B
discussions for more information about displaying terrain or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Profile
View Path
Enabled
Navigation Map Range

AFCS

Terrain Legend

Terrain Enabled Icons
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Altitude Scale

Profile View Total
Distance
Distance Scale

APPENDICES

Figure 6-63 Navigation Map Page with Profile View Terrain and Topographic Data Enabled

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

The Profile View is based on the current aircraft track (or heading if track is unavailable) and shows the highest
known terrain or obstacles within a predetermined width from the present aircraft position to the end of the
profile range. The width of the Profile View is determined by the phase of flight, as annunciated on the HSI,
and is widest during enroute or oceanic phases (Table 6-7).

331

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Flight Phase

Total Profile View Width

Approach

0.6 nm

Departure

0.6 nm

Terminal

2.0 nm

Enroute

4.0 nm

Oceanic

4.0 nm

Table 6-7 Profile View Width Scale

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

PROFILE PATH

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Profile Path displays the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the Profile View. The path is shown as a
white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page and is only available when Profile View is enabled. White range
markers on both edges of the Profile Path rectangle correspond to the range markers along the distance scale
inside the Profile View display window whenever the profile range is at least 4 nm (or 7.5 km if configured
for metric units).
The Profile Path rectangle may be configured on or off, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile
Path is removed from map display can be changed.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Customizing the Profile Path display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-64).

AFCS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Profile’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-65).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-66).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• PROFILE PATH – Turns the display of the Profile Path on or off and sets maximum range at which Profile Path
is shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings).

INDEX

APPENDICES

7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.

332

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Figure 6-64 Navigation Map Page Menu
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-65 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu

Figure 6-66 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Profile Group

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

333

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.4 TERRAIN-SVS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage

EIS

WARNING: Do not use Terrain-SVS information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain-SVS is intended only

NOTE: Terrain-SVS is included with the Synthetic Vision option. If the TAWS-B option is also installed,

to enhance situational awareness.

area.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Terrain-SVS is a terrain awareness system included with the Synthetic Vision option. Terrain-SVS provides
visual annunciations and voice alerts to indicate the presence of threatening terrain and obstacles relevant to
the projected flight path. For detailed information regarding the Synthetic Vision option, refer to the Flight
Instruments section.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

TAWS-B will take precedence over Terrain-SVS.

Terrain-SVS does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It increases situational awareness and
aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT) and obstacles. Do not confuse Terrain-SVS with a Terrain
Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified.
Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more sophisticated algorithms to
assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles and provides additional alerts.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Terrain-SVS does not provide the following:
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR)
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR)

AFCS

• Descent to 500 Feet Voice Callout Alert (VCO)
Terrain-SVS requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Valid terrain/obstacle database

APPENDICES

Terrain-SVS displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.

INDEX

The system’s GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from satellite
position. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height above
mean sea level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity. GSL
altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that
normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
334

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain-SVS
feature portrays a 3-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.

DISPLAYING TERRAIN-SVS DATA

EIS

Terrain-SVS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-67 and Tables 6-8 and 6-9 are used to represent
terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-67 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain-SVS

Obstacle Location

AFCS

Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-8 Terrain-SVS Obstacle Colors and Symbology

Alert Type

Example Annunciation

APPENDICES

Potential Impact
Point Symbol

Warning
Caution

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

Table 6-9 Terrain-SVS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types

335

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Map - Terrain-SVS Page (Figures 6-71 and 6-72) is the principal map page for viewing Terrain-SVS
information. Terrain-SVS information can be displayed on the following maps as an additional reference:
• PFD Inset Map

• Trip Planning Page

• Navigation Map Page

• Flight Plan Pages

Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).

EIS

2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

When Terrain-SVS is enabled on maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page, the system shows a status icon is to
indicate that the feature is enabled for display. A legend for Terrain-SVS terrain colors will accompany the icon
on Navigation, Trip Planning, and Flight Plan Pages (Figure 6-74) . The legend appears without the status icon
on the Terrain-SVS Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

The map settings chosen on the Navigation Map Page affect the map settings used on other maps and pages
(except the Terrain-SVS Page). The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the
range setting made for the Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map
is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also
adjusted proportionally.

336

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-68).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-69).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-70).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown

EIS

• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-68 Navigation Map Page Menu

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 6-69 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu

Figure 6-70 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

337

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

TERRAIN-SVS PAGE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Terrain-SVS Page (Figures 6-71 and 6-72) is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact
point data in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports,
VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of
the aircraft intersect, the system automatically reduces the map range, if necessary, to emphasize the closest
potential impact point on the Terrain-SVS Page.

EIS

Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading-up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arc).
Displaying the Terrain-SVS Page:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain-SVS Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.

2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.

Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.

Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)

APPENDICES

Yellow Lighted Obstacles
(Between 100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft Altitude)

Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window

INDEX

Figure 6-71 Terrain-SVS Page

338

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

Map Range Arc
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

EIS

Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Terrain Legend

Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Annunciation
Window

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-72 Terrain-SVS Page (ARC View)

TERRAIN-SVS ALERTS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The system issues alerts when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within the Terrain-SVS software.
Terrain-SVS alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, the system displays a visual annunciation and issues a voice alert. Table 6-10 shows Terrain-SVS alert
types with corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.

AFCS

During an alert, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciation appears to
the left of the Selected Altitude window on the PFD, and in the terrain annunciation window on the MFD on
pages with Terrain display enabled. If the Terrain-SVS Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears
on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Press the ENT Key (accesses the Terrain-SVS Page)

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

339

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Alert Annunciation

Pop-up
Alert

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-73 Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciations

Terrain Display Enabled
Icon

AFCS

Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 6-74 Navigation Map Page
(After Terrain-SVS Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)

340

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation

MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVS Page)

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Alert Type

Voice Alert
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”

Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)

“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)

“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)

“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)

“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)

“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)

“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”

EIS

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-10 Terrain-SVS Alerts Summary

FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVS compares the projected flight path
as derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The
system issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.

AFCS

The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the
ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest
runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes
narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

341

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Level (FT)

Descending (FT)

800

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)

700

600

500

400

300

200

100

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

0
0

Distance From Runway (NM)

Figure 6-75 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends. When
Terrain-SVS alerts are manually inhibited, the annunciation ‘TER INH’ is shown on the PFD and in the MFD
terrain annunciation window.

Figure 6-76 Terrain-SVS Alerting Disabled
(Terrain-SVS Inhibited) Annunciation

AFCS

Inhibiting/enabling Terrain-SVS alerting:
1) Select the Terrain-SVS Page.
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable Terrain-SVS (choice dependent on current state).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit Terrain-SVS’ or ‘Enable Terrain-SVS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES

While Terrain-SVS alerting is manually inhibited (or the system is unavailable or has failed), the system may
display a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation if the following conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GBAS SBAS approach.
• The Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint.
• The aircraft is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix..

INDEX

See the Flight Instruments Section for more details about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.

342

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM STATUS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

During power-up, Terrain-SVS conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. An voice alert
is issued at test completion.
Terrain-SVS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the system issues the voice alert “Terrain System
Failure” along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.

System Test in Progress
System Test Pass

None

No GPS position

None

“Terrain System Test OK”

None

NO GPS POSITION

“Terrain System Not Available”*

None

“Terrain System Not Available”*

TERRAIN FAIL

“Terrain System Failure”

TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE

None

AFCS

None

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, and
Terrain-SVS operating with PFD
Terrain or Obstacle databases

Voice Alert

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Terrain Alerting Inhibited

Terrain-SVS Page Center
Banner Annunciation
TERRAIN TEST

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

PFD/MFD† Alert
Annunciation

Alert Type

EIS

Terrain-SVS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVS Page. The voice alert “Terrain
System Not Available” is generated. When sufficient GPS signal is returns and the aircraft is within the
database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

† Annunciation is shown on Terrain-SVS Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “Terrain System Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-11 Terrain-SVS System Status Annunciations

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

343

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.5 TAWS-B

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately

EIS

WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS is intended only to enhance

NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage

situational awareness.

processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.

area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B) is an optional software feature that provides audio
and visual warning messages to alert the flight crew of potential conflicts between the current flight path and
surrounding terrain and obstacles. The TAWS-B messages are advisory in nature only.
TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

TAWS-B requires the following to operate properly:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information from by government sources. Terrain information is based on
terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be shown
if available in the database. Garmin verifies the data, per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information
should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data may be inaccurate.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

TAWS-B uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea
level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to
determine TAWS-B alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations
in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local
altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude
provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.

APPENDICES

The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and GSL
altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and “predict” the
aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-B can provide
advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.

INDEX

Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.

344

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

DISPLAYING TAWS-B DATA

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

TAWS-B uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-77 and Tables 6-12 and 6-13 are used to represent
terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 6-77 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL

Obstacle Location

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Table 6-12 Terrain-SVS Obstacle Colors and Symbology

AFCS

Potential Impact
Point Symbol

Alert Type

Example Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Warning
Caution
Table 6-13 Terrain-SVS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

345

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Map - TAWS-B Page (Figures 6-82 and 6-83) on the MFD is the principal map page for viewing TAWS-B
information. TAWS-B information can be displayed on the following maps and pages:
• PFD Inset Map

• Trip Planning Page

• Navigation Map Page

• Flight Plan Pages

• TAWS-B Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the TAWS-B Page):

EIS

1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

When TAWS-B is selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, an icon is shown to indicate that the feature
is enabled for display. A legend for TAWS-B terrain colors will accompany the icon on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-78) and the Flight Plan Pages. The icon is always shown on the TAWS-B Page.

Figure 6-78 Terrain Icon and Legend

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

AFCS

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The map settings chosen on the Navigation Map Page affect the map settings used on other maps and pages
(except the TAWS-B Page). The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the
range setting made for the Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map
is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also
adjusted proportionally.

346

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-79).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-80).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-81).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown

EIS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-79 Navigation Map Page Menu

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 6-80 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu

Figure 6-81 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

347

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

TAWS-B PAGE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The TAWS-B Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation to the
aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs)
can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the system
automatically reduces the map range, if necessary, to emphasize the closest potential impact point on the
TAWS-B Page.

EIS

Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the TAWS-B Page:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-B Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.

2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.

Changing the TAWS-B Page view:
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view

Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.

348

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

Map Range Rings
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)

EIS

Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Yellow Lighted
Obstacles (Between
100’ and 1000’
Below Aircraft
Altitude)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-82 TAWS-B Page

Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Map Orientation
Current Aircraft
GPS-derived GSL
Altitude
Map Range Arc

AFCS

Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend

Red Lighted Obstacle
(Above or Within
100’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)

Annunciation
Window

APPENDICES

Figure 6-83 TAWS-B Page (ARC View)

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

349

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

TAWS-B ALERTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert
is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and voice alerts are simultaneously issued. Table 6-14 shows
TAWS-B alert types with corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.

EIS

When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert Annunciation
appears to the left of the Selected Altitude box on the PFD, and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the
TAWS-B Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up
alert:
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Alert Annunciation

Pop-up
Alert

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 6-84 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations

Terrain Display Enabled

INDEX

Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-85 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)

350

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)

Voice Alert

Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
*
or
*
or

“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”

“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”

Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)

Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)

Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)

Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)

AFCS

“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”

Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

“Too Low, Terrain”
None

None

“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*

APPENDICES

Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)

“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up’

EIS

Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

“Pull Up”

Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)

Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Voice Callout
(VCO) “500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation

Alert Type

“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”

INDEX

* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-14 TAWS-B Alerts Summary

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

351

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is
determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain a rate that is calculated to be excessive relative to height
above terrain. Figure 6-86 shows the parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

4500

EIS

4000

NK
: “SI

ion

Caut

3500

”

RATE

3000

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2500
2000

Warning: “PULL UP”

1500
1000

12000

11000

Descent Rate (FPM)

10000

9000

8000

7000

6000

5000

4000

3000

2000

1000

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

500

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-86 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria

FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE

AFCS

The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of TAWS-B compares the projected flight path as
derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The system
issues FLTA alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

APPENDICES

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-87. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-B Page.

INDEX

Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are

352

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-87.
Level (FT)

Descending (FT)

800

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

600

500

400

EIS

Required
Clearance
(FT)
Required Terrain
Clearance (FT)

700

300

200

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

100

0
0

Distance From Runway (NM)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-87 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-88).

AFCS

PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

600

500

400

300

APPENDICES

Height Above Destination (Feet)

700

PDA ALERTING AREA

200

100

Distance to Destination (NM)
INDEX

Figure 6-88 PDA Alerting Threshold

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

353

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The pilot can inhibit PDA and FLTA visual annunciations and voice alerts. Discretion should be used when
inhibiting these alerts, as they should be enabled when appropriate. When PDA and FLTA alerts are manually
inhibited, the system displays the a ‘TAWS INH’ annunciation on the PFD and in the TAWS-B annunciation
window of the MFD (Figure 6-89).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

PFD

MFD

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-89 TAWS-B Alerting Inhibited
Annunciation

Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.

AFCS

2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.

While TAWS-B alerting is manually inhibited (or the system is unavailable or has failed), the system may
display a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation if the following conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GBAS SBAS approach.

APPENDICES

• The Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint.
• The aircraft is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix..

INDEX

See the Flight Instruments Section for more details about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.

354

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FIVE-HUNDRED VOICE ALERT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The purpose of the voice alert message “Five-hundred” is to provide an advisory alert of when the aircraft
descends to within 500 feet above the terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within 5 nm of an
airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft
is more than 5 nm of the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height above terrain.
There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany this voice alert.

NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)

EIS

The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 2 nm or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figures 6-90 and 6-91 shows the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b for altitude loss and
climb rate respectively.
1000

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

800
700
600

“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”

500
400
300

AFCS

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

900

200

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

100
0
0

100

120

140

Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-90 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

355

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1000

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Height Above Terrain (Feet)

900
800
700
600

“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”

500
400
300

EIS

200
100
0
500

1000

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1500

2000

2500

3000

3500

4000

4500

5000

5500

6000

6500

7000

Sink Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-91 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM STATUS
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its visual annunciations and voice alerts. The system test
can also be manually initiated. A voice alert is issued at test completion. TAWS-B System Testing is disabled
when ground speed exceeds 30 knots.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-92).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.

APPENDICES

Figure 6-92 TAWS-B Page Menu

TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is generated
along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.

INDEX

TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the system
displays the ‘TAWS N/A’ annunciation, and issues the “TAWS Not Available” voice alert. When the GPS signal
integrity returns and the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the system issues the voice alert, “TAWS
Available” .
356

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PFD/MFD* Alert TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation
Annunciation

Alert Type

System Test pass

None

TAWS-B FLTA Alerting Inhibited

None

“TAWS System Test Test OK”

None

NO GPS POSITION

“TAWS Not Available”

None

“TAWS Not Available”

TAWS FAIL

“TAWS System Failure”

TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE

None

EIS

TAWS TEST

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

System Test in progress

Voice Alert

No GPS position

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

None

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Excessively degraded GPS signal;
or Out of database coverage
area
TAWS-B System Test Fail; Terrain
or Obstacle database unavailable
or invalid; Invalid software
configuration; or System audio
fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or invalid.
TAWS operating with PFD Terrain
or Obstacle databases

† Annunciation is shown on TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
* “TAWS Available” will be heard when sufficient GPS signal is received, or Terrain database coverage area reentered.
Table 6-15 TAWS-B System Status Annunciations

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

357

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.6 TRAFFIC INFORMATION SERVICE (TIS)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory use only. TIS is intended to help the
pilot locate traffic visually. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar

EIS

site. Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to both Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS) and TIS.
Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent
indication.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

NOTE: TIS is disabled if a Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is installed.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the
Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated
every 5 seconds. The system displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet below to
3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. The system displays TIS traffic with the symbology shown in Table 6-16.
TIS Symbol

Description
Non-Threat Traffic

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale

AFCS

Table 6-16 TIS Traffic Symbols

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Traffic Advisories (TA) alert the crew to intruding aircraft. When traffic meets the advisory criteria for the TA,
a solid yellow circle symbol appears. A TA which is detected but is outside the range of the map on which traffic
is displayed are indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map.

APPENDICES

TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-97) or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page on
which traffic can be displayed (Figure 6-93).

INDEX

The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.

358

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

DISPLAYING TRAFFIC DATA

• Navigation Map Page

• Nearest Pages

• Traffic Map Page

• Active Flight Plan Page

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic TIS is
operating:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page

EIS

Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Press the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an icon is shown to indicate the feature is
enabled for display.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, Not
Reporting
Altitude

AFCS

TA Off Scale
Banner
Annunciation

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Traffic System
Status Banner
Annunciations
Non-Bearing
Traffic Advisory
Figure 6-93 TIS Traffic on Navigation Map Page

APPENDICES

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.

359

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.

Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.

EIS

2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-94).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-95).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-96).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.

360

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

Figure 6-94 Navigation Map Page Menu

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 6-95 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu

Figure 6-96 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group

TRAFFIC MAP PAGE

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up
unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated
by the map range rings.

AFCS

The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to
Operating Mode and the system begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion for
more information.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.

APPENDICES

3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:

Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.

361

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Mode Annunciation

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status

Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending

Traffic Advisory, 500’
Below, Climbing

EIS

“Non-Bearing” Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 4.0 nm,
500’ Above,
Descending

Range
Marking
Rings

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Off-Scale Traffic
Advisory
400’ Below, Level

Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Traffic Status Banner
Annunciations
Figure 6-97 Traffic Map Page

Select
to Mute
“TIS Not
Available”
Voice Alert

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

TIS ALERTS
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.

AFCS

• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.

362

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 6-98 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)

A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.

AFCS

Muting the “TIS Not Available” voice alert:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the TNA MUTE Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.

APPENDICES

b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

363

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

SYSTEM STATUS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The system performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.

EIS

Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Banner Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
DATA FAILED
a failure is detected in the data stream*
FAILED

The transponder has failed*

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

UNAVAILABLE

TIS is unavailable or out of range

* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Table 6-17 TIS Failure Annunciations

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

TIS System Failed

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

No Data Received
from Transponder

APPENDICES

Figure 6-99 TIS Power-up Test Failure

INDEX

The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.

364

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)

TIS Operating

OPERATING
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)

TIS Failed*

FAIL

Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

TIS Standby

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Mode

* See Table 6-19 for additional failure annunciations
EIS

Table 6-18 TIS Modes

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Switching between TIS modes:
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Press the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.

Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA OFF SCALE

TRFC COAST

Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range

INDEX

TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL

APPENDICES

TRFC RMVD

A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AGE MM:SS

Description

AFCS

TA X.X ± XX ↕

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed (Table 6-19).

*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-19 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

365

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

6.7 GTS 800 TRAFFIC

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.

EIS

information within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate
information from other aircraft, traffic may be present but not represented on the display.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or
not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
NOTE: TIS is disabled when TAS installed.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The optional Garmin GTS 800 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). It enhances flight crew situational awareness
by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also provides visual annunciations
and voice traffic alerts to assist in visually acquiring traffic.
The GTS 800 is capable of tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A or C transponders, and
up to 30 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode S transponders. A maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest
threat potential can be displayed simultaneously. No TAS surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating
transponders.

AFCS

THEORY OF OPERATION

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When the GTS 800 is in Operating Mode, the unit interrogates the transponders of intruding aircraft while
monitoring transponder replies. The system uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing, and
if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The GTS 825 then
calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach (CPA). If the closure
rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), the system issues visual annunciations and voice alerts.

APPENDICES

TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY

INDEX

The GTS 800 TAS surveillance system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude. Under
ideal conditions, the system scans transponder traffic up to 12 nm in the forward direction. The range is
somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional interrogation signal patterns. In
areas of greater transponder traffic density or when TCAS II (Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System II)
systems are detected, the GTS 800 automatically reduces its interrogation transmitter power (and therefore
range) in order to limit potential interference from other signals.

366

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

In addition, if a 1090 MHz extended squitter transponder is installed, and the traffic system detects airborne
traffic providing 1090 MHz Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B) information, the system
will display the TAS traffic using the ADS-B symbology shown in Table 6-21.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Do not confuse this functionality with full ADS-B capability, which can provide traffic information

from ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and ADS-B traffic outside of the TAS surveillance volume.
This system is limited to displaying ADS-B information from suitably equipped airborne aircraft within the
TAS surveillance volume.
Description

EIS

TAS Symbol

Non-Threat Traffic
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-20 TAS Symbol Description

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Symbol

Description
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in
the direction of the aircraft track.

AFCS

Non-threat traffic with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Traffic with ADS-B directional information, but positional accuracy
is degraded. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.

Table 6-21 TAS Traffic with ADS-B Symbology

APPENDICES

A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a yellow circle or triangle, alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous
intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory
that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen
at the relative bearing of the intruder.
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates the intruding aircraft
is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.

INDEX

A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for traffic beyond 6 nm
that is neither a TA or PA.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

367

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
A solid white rounded arrow indicates either a PA or Non-Threat traffic with ADS-B directional information,
but the position of the traffic is shown with degraded accuracy.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet (Figure 6-100). When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a
minus sign ‘-’ indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
A vertical trend arrow to the right of the intruder symbol (Figure 6-100) indicates climbing or descending
traffic (at least 500 feet per minute) with an upward or downward-pointing arrow respectively.

EIS

Relative Altitude
Vertical trend arrow

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 6-100 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If the intruding aircraft is providing ADS-B track information, this is displayed as a vector line extending
beyond the traffic symbol in the direction of the track (Figure 6-101).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Vector Line indicates
intruder aircraft track

Figure 6-101 Intruder Traffic with ADS-B Directional
Information and Track

AFCS

Flight IDs may also be displayed with traffic symbols; see the Flight IDs discussion in this section for more
information.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

On-ground aircraft with Mode S transponders are not displayed.

368

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TA ALERTING CONDITIONS

Sensitivity Intruder Altitude
Level
Available

Yes

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within
600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within
800 feet.
Intruder range is less than 20 seconds.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Yes

TA Alerting Conditions

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The traffic system automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA
alerting during flight phases likely to be near airports. The system applies Level A TA sensitivity when the
groundspeed is less than 120 knots; Level B TA sensitivity applies in all other conditions.

Table 6-22 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

369

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

TAS ALERTS
When the GTS 800 detects a new TA, the following occur:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• The system issues a single “Traffic!” voice alert, followed by additional voice information about the bearing,
relative altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-23). For example,
the announcement “Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own
aircraft, above own altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashes for five seconds, and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-102).

EIS

• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined, a yellow text banner will be displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA symbol. The text will indicate
“TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the TA traffic, if known.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.

AFCS

Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 6-102 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)

Bearing

Relative Altitude

Approximate Distance (nm)

“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”

“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”

“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”

INDEX

Table 6-23 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements

370

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM TEST
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not available during the system test. Use caution when performing a system

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

test during flight.
The GTS 800 provides a system test mode to verify the TAS system is operating normally. The test takes
ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols appears on the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-103). If the system test passes, the system announces, “TAS System Test Passed”
Otherwise the system announces, “TAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is complete, the traffic
system enters Standby Mode.

EIS

Testing the traffic system:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the Range knob to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern to be displayed during test.
4) Press the TEST Softkey.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
Test Mode Annunciation

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Operating
Mode
Non-Threat
Traffic at
11 o’clock,
Distance 3.6
nm, 1000’
Above, Level

AFCS

Proximity
Traffic at
1 o’clock,
Distance
3.6 nm,
1000’ Below,
Descending

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

TA at 9 o’clock,
Distance 2.0
nm, 200’ Below,
Climbing

APPENDICES

Figure 6-103 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

371

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

OPERATION
NOTE: The GTS 800 automatically changes from STANDBY to OPERATE mode eight seconds after takeoff.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The unit also automatically changes from OPERATE to STANDBY mode 24 seconds after landing.

After power-up, the GTS 800 is in Standby Mode. The GTS 800 must be in Operating Mode for traffic to be
displayed and for TAs to be issued.
Selecting the OPERATE Softkey allows the traffic unit to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as
necessary. Selecting the STANDBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.

EIS

Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the STANDBY Softkey.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Standby Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the OPERATE Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Operate Mode’.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Press the ENT Key. The traffic unit switches from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.

372

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TRAFFIC MAP PAGE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob, as indicated by the map range rings.
The system annunciates the traffic mode and altitude display mode in the upper left corner of the Traffic
Map Page.
Altitude
Mode

Traffic Advisory with ADS-B Directional
Information, 500’ Below, Climbing
EIS

Altitude
Mode
Non-Threat Traffic,
2500’ Above,
Descending

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Traffic Display
Range Rings

“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Climbing
Proximity Traffic,
900’ Above,
Level, Flight ID
Displayed

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Non-Threat
Traffic with
ADS-B
Directional
Information,
1000’ Above,
Level
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Figure 6-104 Traffic Map Page

AFCS

Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Press the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ appears in the Traffic mode field.

APPENDICES

4) Press the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ appears in the Traffic mode
field.
5) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

373

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Altitude Mode

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The pilot can select the range of altitude in which to display non-threat and proximity traffic. If a TA
occurs, even outside of this range, the system will display the TA traffic.
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Press one of the following Softkeys:

EIS

• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
• UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) To return to the Traffic Page, press the BACK Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in step 2 above):

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• ABOVE
• NORMAL
• BELOW
• UNRESTRICTED

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

3) Press the ENT Key.

374

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Flight ID Display

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be enabled for display on the Traffic Map Page
(Figure 6-105). When the system receives a flight ID, it will appear above or below the corresponding
traffic symbol on the Traffic Map Page when the FLT ID Softkey is enabled.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Flight ID

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 6-105 Traffic Map Page with Flight ID Enabled

Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:

On the Traffic Map Page, press the FLT ID Softkey.
AFCS

Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘Show Flight IDs’ or ‘Hide Flight IDs’ (choice dependent on current state)
(Figure 6-106).
3) Press the ENT Key.

APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 6-106 Traffic Map Page Menu

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

375

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page Display Range

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
2) The following range options are available:
• 2 nm

EIS

• 2 and 6 nm
• 6 and 12 nm

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Map - Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information
can also be displayed on the following other maps for additional reference on the MFD when the traffic unit
is operating:
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Trip Planning Page

• Active Flight Plan Page

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) option
is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.

AFCS

When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, the system shows a traffic status icon to
indicate traffic is enabled for display (Figure 6-107).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map
1) Ensure the traffic system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, press the MAP Softkey.

INDEX

APPENDICES

2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in Figure 6-107.

376

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending

Proximity
Traffic, 900’
Above, Level

EIS

TA Off Scale Banner
Annunciation

Traffic Status
Icon
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

“No Bearing”
Traffic Advisory
Banner Annunciation
Figure 6-107 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-108).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-109).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-110).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:

AFCS

- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).

APPENDICES

7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

377

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Figure 6-108 Navigation Map Page Menu

Figure 6-109 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu

Figure 6-110 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.

AFCS

Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD Inset Map by pressing the INSET Softkey. A traffic map
will appear in heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic
and optional data link weather information.
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Select the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).

INDEX

APPENDICES

4) Select the softkey again to remove traffic data.

378

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.

TAS System Test
Initiated

TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)

TAS Operating

OPERATING

TAS Failed*

FAIL

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)

EIS

TAS Standby

Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)

Mode

* See Table 6-25 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-24 TAS Modes

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Traffic Map Page Center
Description
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
DATA FAILED
unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-25 TAS Failure Annunciations

AFCS

The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation

TRFC FAIL

INDEX

NO TRFC DATA

A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit

APPENDICES

TA X.X ± XX ↕

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

TA OFF SCALE

Description

*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-26 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

379

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

HAZARD AVOIDANCE

Blank Page

380

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
NOTE: The approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) always supersedes this Pilot’s Guide.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The digital Garmin Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is fully integrated within the G1000 System
avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description.
AFCS functionality in the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units
(LRUs):
• GSA 80 AFCS Pitch Trim Servo (1)

• GDU 1044 Multi-Function Display (MFD) (1)

• GSA 81 AFCS Pitch and Roll Servos (2)

• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (IAUs) (2)

• GSM 86 servo Gearboxes (3)

EIS

• GDU 1040 Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) (1)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The Garmin AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
• Flight Director (FD) — The Piper PA-44-180 Seminole flight director commands are displayed on the PFD.
The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
– Autopilot communication

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, and pitch trim servos adapter. It also
provides servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands,
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
• Manual Electric Pitch Trim (MEPT) — The pitch trim servo provides manual electric pitch trim capability
when the autopilot is not engaged.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

381

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.1 BASIC AUTOPILOT OPERATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

This section provides an overview for autopilot engagement and disengagement. A more detailed description
follows in the Autopilot Operation section.
• Autopilot Engagement — The autopilot may be engaged by pushing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit.
Annunciations regarding the engagement are indicated on the PFD.

EIS

• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director Off — Upon engagement, the autopilot will be set to hold the
current attitude of the airplane, if the flight director was not previously on. In this case, ‘PIT’ and ‘ROL’ will be
annunciated.
• Autopilot Engagement with Flight Director On — If the flight director is on, the autopilot will smoothly
pitch and roll the airplane to capture the FD command bars. The prior flight directore modes remain unchanged.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Autopilot Disengagement — The most common way to disconnect the autopilot is to press and release the
AP DISC Switch, which is located on each control wheel. An autopilot disconnect tone will be heard and
annunciated on the PFD. Other ways to disconnect the autopilot include:
– Pressing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Unit

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

– Operating the MEPT Switch (located on the each control wheel)
– Pulling the autopilot circuit breaker

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

In the event of unexpected autopilot behavior, pressing and holding the AP DISC Switch will disconnect the
autopilot and remove all power to the servos.

382

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

7.2 AFCS CONTROLS
The following dedicated AFCS keys are located on the bezels of the MFD:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AP Key
FD Key

EIS

Engages/disengages the autopilot
2
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Pressing once turns on the flight director in the default pitch and roll modes. Pressing
again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command Bars. If the autopilot
is engaged, the key is disabled.
3 NAV Key
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
4 ALT Key
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
5 VS Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
6 FLC Key
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
7 HDG Key
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
8 APR Key
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
9 VNV Key
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
10 NOSE UP/NOSE Control the mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change
modes
DN Keys
1

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

10
6

Figure 7-1 Dedicated AFCS Controls
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

383

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
The following AFCS controls are located separately from the AFCS Control Unit:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AP DISC Switch
(Autopilot
Disconnect)

EIS

CWS Button
(Control Wheel
Steering)

Disengages the autopilot and flight director and interrupts pitch trim operation
An AP DISC Switch is located on each control wheel.
This switch may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
associated aural tone.
While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is engaged and
synchronizes the flight director’s Command Bars with the current aircraft pitch (if
not in a Vertical Navigation, Glideslope, or Glidepath Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold
Mode)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

A CWS Button is located on each control wheel.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

TO/GA Switch
(Go Around)

Upon release of the CWS Button, the flight director may establish new pitch and roll
references, depending on the current vertical and lateral modes. CWS operation
details are discussed in the respective mode sections of this manual.
Selects flight director Takeoff (on ground) or Go Around (in air) Mode
If an approach procedure is loaded this switch also activates the missed approach when
the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and
a valid frequency has been tuned.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The TO/GA Switch is located on the throttle.
MEPT Switch
Used to command manual electric pitch trim. An MEPT Switch is located on each
(Manual Electric control wheel.
Pitch Trim)
This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is the ARM

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

contact and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP (rearward) contacts.
Pushing the MEPT ARM Switch disengages the autopilot, if currently engaged. The
MEPT ARM Switch may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and
mute the associated aural tone.

INDEX

APPENDICES

LVL Button
Level Mode

Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch are operated
simultaneously. If either side of the switch is active separately for more than three
seconds, MEPT function is disabled and ‘PTRM’ is displayed as the AFCS Status
Annunciation on the PFDs. The function remains disabled until both sides of the
switch are inactivated.
The LVL Button engages the autopilot in Level Mode for pitch and roll.

384

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

7.3 FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFDs.
With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (-15°, +20°) and roll (25°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to
values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.

ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR

Modes Selected

APR Key

Approach**

HDG Key

Heading Select

Pitch Hold (default)

PIT

Pitch Hold (default)

PIT

Pitch Hold (default)

PIT

AFCS

Navigation**

TO/GA Switch

ROL
ROL
ROL
TO
GA
ROL
ROL
ROL
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

NAV Key

FD Key
AP Key
CWS Button

Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Takeoff (on ground)
TO
Go Around (in air)
GA
Altitude Hold
ALT
Vertical Speed
VS
Vertical Path Tracking* VPTH

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

ALT Key
VS Key
VNV Key

Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Control Pressed

EIS

An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 (when the flight director is not active) activates the pilot-side flight
director in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the
displays by pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

385

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

AFCS STATUS BOX

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFDs when the flight director is active. Flight
director selection and autopilot statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Lateral flight director
modes are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes are displayed in white and active in
green.

EIS

Lateral Modes

Armed

Active

Autopilot
Status

Vertical Modes

Flight Director Active
Indicator Arrow

Mode
Reference

Armed

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

AFCS Status Box
Selected
Altitude

Command
Bars

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Vertical
Speed
Reference

AFCS

GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display

386

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll mode(s).
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation,
when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s)
for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode
annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.

EIS

If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. If
after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 7-3 Loss of VOR Signal

The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

COMMAND BARS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFDs as a single-cue.
The Command Bars do not override the (yellow) Aircraft Symbol. The single-cue Command Bars (Figure 7-4)
move together vertically to indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll commands.

AFCS

Command Bars

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Aircraft Symbol
Figure 7-4 Single-cue Command Bars

APPENDICES

If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars
are removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if the pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

387

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.4 VERTICAL MODES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Table 7-2 lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode reference is
displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes.
The NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating under
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode. Increments of change and acceptable ranges of values
for each of these references using the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys are also listed in the table.

EIS

Vertical Mode

Description

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Pitch Hold
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Vertical Speed

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Flight Level Change, IAS Hold

Vertical Path Tracking
VNV Target Altitude Capture

AFCS

Glidepath

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Glideslope
Takeoff

APPENDICES

Go Around
Level

Holds the current aircraft pitch
attitude; may be used to climb/
descend to the Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
Holds the current Altitude Reference
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
speed; may be used to climb/descend
to the Selected Altitude
Maintains the current aircraft
airspeed while the aircraft is
climbing/descending to the Selected
Altitude
Captures and tracks descent legs of
an active vertical profile
Captures the Vertical Navigation
(VNV) Target Altitude
Captures and tracks the WAAS
glidepath on approach
Captures and tracks the ILS glideslope
on approach
Commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level on the ground in
preparation for takeoff
Commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level in the air
Commands a zero degree pitch angle
and wings level

Reference
Range

Reference
Change
Increment

-15° to
+20°

0.5°

nnnn fpm

-3000 to
+1500 fpm

100 fpm

nnn kt

80 to
204 kts

1 kt

Control Annunciation

(default)

PIT

*
ALTS
ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
VS Key

FLC Key FLC
VNV
Key

VPTH

ALTV

APR
Key

TO/GA
Switch

LVL
Button

GP
GS
TO

10°

7°

LVL

Pitch angle
to maintain
0 fpm VS

* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, TO, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected Altitude is to be captured
instead of VNV Target Altitude
INDEX

** ALTV armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of Selected Altitude
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes

388

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the
nose-up/down limit.

EIS

When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys

Pitch Hold
Mode Active

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the CWS
Button
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Selected
Altitude

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

389

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Pitch Hold

• Go Around

• Vertical Speed

• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude is to
be captured instead of the VNV Target Altitude)

• Flight Level Change

EIS

The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-5 for
example). The ALT Knob on the MFD is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until
Selected Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-6). This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (shown as the Altitude Reference). As Altitude
Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes
green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic transition.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)

Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition

AFCS

Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Use of the ALT Knob on the MFD to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
active causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for
the new Selected Altitude.

390

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current aircraft
altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference, shown in the
AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter. Altitude Hold Mode
active is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode (see
Figure 7-7). Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the altitude
error is less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude Reference.

EIS

NOTE: Turning the ALT Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the flight

director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.

Altitude Hold
Mode Active

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

With the CWS Button depressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new Altitude Reference. When the CWS
Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the Altitude Reference.
Altitude
Reference

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Selected
Altitude

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Selected
Altitude
Bug

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

391

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current aircraft
vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed
Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the
Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected.

EIS

When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS Status
Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on
the indicator.
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Using the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Vertical Speed
Mode Active

Vertical
Speed
Reference

Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed

AFCS

Selected
Altitude

Vertical
Speed
Reference

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug

Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference

INDEX

Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode

392

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT LEVEL CHANGE MODE (FLC)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter). When
Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed, and
altitude.

EIS

The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode is
indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the Airspeed
Reference along the tape.

Airspeed
Reference

Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Flight Level
Change Mode
Active

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Airspeed
Reference

AFCS

Airspeed
Reference
Bug

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Command Bars Indicate Climb
to attain Selected Altitude

APPENDICES

Figure 7-9 Flight Level Change Mode (IAS)

The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by:
• Using the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys

INDEX

• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Airspeed Reference, then releasing the CWS
Button
NOTE: If the Selected Altitude is reached during CWS maneuvering, the Altitude Reference is not changed.

To adjust the Altitude Reference in this case, the CWS Button must be pressed again after the Selected
Altitude is reached.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

393

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active. Refer to the Flight Management

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Section for more information on VNV flight plans.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.

Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations when
VNV flight planning is available. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS

• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight control
modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon reaching
the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and cancels any
armed VNV modes.

VERTICAL PATH TRACKING MODE (VPTH)
NOTE: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path

AFCS

Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Button.

APPENDICES

When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope Mode
is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable, the
appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the Selected
Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.

INDEX

Figure 7-10 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations

394

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• Pressing the VNV Key
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
If acknowledgment is not received within 1 minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.

EIS

In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the PFD Navigation Status
Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and
vertical speed required) appear on the PFDs in magenta (Figure 7-11).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Altitude Hold
Mode Active

Vertical Path Tracking
Armed, (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

VNV Target
Altitude

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Enroute
Phase of
Flight

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source

AFCS

Required
Vertical Speed
Indicator

Vertical
Deviation
Indicator

APPENDICES

Figure 7-11 Vertical Path Capture

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

395

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile (Figure 7-12). An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed as
appropriate.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Vertical Path
Tracking Active

VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

VNV Target
Altitude

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source

Terminal
Phase of
Flight

Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed

Required
Vertical Speed
Indication
(RVSI)

Vertical
Deviation
Indicator (VDI)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 7-12 Vertical Path Tracking Mode

AFCS

If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path (without
commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to reestablish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director to
revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.

APPENDICES

• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in the
vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by flight plan
changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).

INDEX

• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.

396

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Non-Path Descents

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode to
allow profile re-capture.

Figure 7-13 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
EIS

To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.

VNV TARGET ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTV)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,

Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected Altitude.
The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target Altitudes are
shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded from a database
(see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute” is annunciated in
the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator (see
Figure 7-12).

AFCS

NOTE: When the Selected Altitude is set to the VNV Target Altitude, Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)

will be armed even though the altitude value is part of the active VNAV flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT” annunciation. The
VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains displayed
above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed once VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

397

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the white ‘ALT’
annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate the automatic
transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing upcoming descent legs to be
captured and subsequently tracked.
Altitude Reference (In
This Case, Equal To
VNV Altitude Target)

EIS

Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 7-14 VNV Altitude Capture
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the flight
director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture mode are
armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending on which
altitude is to be intercepted first.
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management Section
for details).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

GLIDEPATH MODE (GP)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot

guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.

AFCS

Glidepath Mode is used to track the WAAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Selecting Glidepath Mode:
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LP+V, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight
plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).

APPENDICES

NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized

INDEX

3) Press the APR Key.

WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the

approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA) and
are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.

aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.

398

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Figure 7-15 Glidepath Mode Armed

Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
• Vertical deviation is valid.

EIS

• The CDI is at less than full scale deviation
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

GPS Approach
Mode Active

Glidepath
Mode Active

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath
Glidepath
Indicator

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

LNAV/VNAV
Approach
Active

AFCS

GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source

Figure 7-16 Glidepath Mode

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

399

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.

Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.

EIS

2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Or:
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 7-17 Glideslope Mode Armed

Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the glideslope,
the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Approach
Mode Active

Glideslope
Mode Active

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Active ILS
Frequency Tuned

INDEX

NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source

Command Bars Indicate Descent
on Localizer/Glideslope Path

Figure 7-18 Glideslope Mode

400

Glideslope
Indicator

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TAKEOFF (TO) AND GO AROUND (GA) MODES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

In Takeoff and Go Around modes, the flight director commands a constant set pitch attitude. The TO/GA
Switch is used to select both modes. The mode entered by the flight director depends on whether the aircraft
is on the ground. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when the aircraft is at least 400 feet
below the Selected altitude at the time Takeoff or Go Around Mode is selected.
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode can be selected only
while on the ground by pushing the TO/GA Switch. The flight director Command Bars assume a wings-level,
pitch-up attitude. Autopilot engagement while Takeoff Mode is active is inhibited while the aircraft is on the
ground.

EIS

Pressing the TO/GA Switch while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Attempts to modify the aircraft attitude (i.e., with
the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys or CWS Button) result in reversion to Pitch Hold Mode.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Go Around Mode Active

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Autopilot Disconnect Annunciation
Flashes Yellow for 5 seconds

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Command Bars Indicate Climb
Figure 7-19 Go Around Mode

APPENDICES

Takeoff Mode Active

Figure 7-20 Takeoff Mode
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

401

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.5 LATERAL MODES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The following table relates each AFCS lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer to the
vertical modes section for information regarding Takeoff and Go Around modes.
NOTE: The AFCS may generate a lower bank angle than the maximum roll command limit in degrees

indicated in table 7-3 by the amount needed to produce a turn rate equal to or less than standard rate.

EIS

Lateral Mode

Control Annunciation

Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the Selected HDG
Heading
Key

Roll Hold
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Description

Heading Select *

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Navigation, GPS *
Navigation, VOR Enroute Capture/Track *

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Navigation, LOC Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)

25°

HDG

25°

GPS

30°
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
30°
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track

VOR
NAV
Key

LOC
BC

Approach, GPS

GPS

Approach, LOC Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)

AFCS

ROL

Navigation, Backcourse Capture/Track

Approach, VOR Capture/Track

Takeoff
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC, BC)

Go Around
Level

Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, APR Key
LOC)
Commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level on the ground in
TO/GA
preparation for takeoff
Switch
Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level in the air
Commands wings level with zero
LVL
degree pitch angle
Button

Maximum Roll
Command Limit

VAPP
LOC
TO

Wings Level

LVL

Wings Level

APPENDICES

* The Heading, Navigation GPS and Navigation VOR mode maximum roll command limit will be limited to the Low Bank
mode value if it is engaged.
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes

INDEX

The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS Button.

402

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls wings level.

Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°

EIS

Figure 7-21 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation

Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
> 25°

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is
annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle
condition.

Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Button.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

403

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a cyan bug on the HSI and in the box to the upper
left of the HSI.
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.

EIS

The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the
aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading
upon release of the CWS Button.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes
of more than 330° at a time result in turn reversals.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Heading Select
Mode Active

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Selected
Heading

Selected
Heading
Bug

Command Bars Indicate
Required Turn Toward
Selected Heading

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 7-22 Heading Select Mode

404

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at

approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.

EIS

NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering commands
from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC
approaches where vertical guidance is not required.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft
heading. Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The
annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode (Figure 7-25).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI is less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV Key
is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active roll mode.
Figure 7-23 GPS Navigation Mode Armed

AFCS

When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed automatically when the navigation source switch takes place if the APR Key is not pressed prior
to the automatic source switch.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)

APPENDICES

• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

405

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

GPS Navigation
Mode Active

GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source

Command Bars Indicate Left Turn
to Track GPS Course and Climb to
Intercept Selected Altitude

Selected
Course

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 7-24 Navigation Mode
Pitch Hold
Mode Active

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Backcourse
Mode Active

LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source

Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude

INDEX

Figure 7-25 Backcourse Mode

Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in Navigation
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button
is released.
406

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected navigation
receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the CDI is greater
than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active lateral mode). If
the CDI is less than one dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.

EIS

VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

3) Press the APR Key.

When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.

AFCS

Figure 7-26 GPS Approach Mode Armed

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC Approach
Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the difference
between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:

APPENDICES

1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

407

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.

2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
4) Press the APR Key.

If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated

EIS

• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
• During a LOC/ILS approach GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in Approach
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the CWS Button
is released.
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not reset any reference data while in Backcourse
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course when the CWS Button is released.

INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC

AFCS

The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS Navigation
Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is the active flight
plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS. Thus, even if the APR
key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial Approach Fix (IAF),
Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation Mode.
The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the arc
segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation Mode,
the AFCS will no longer track the arc.

408

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

7.6 AUTOPILOT OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the POH for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Piper PA-44-180 Seminole autopilot operates the flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight
control. The autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the flight
director. Pitch autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any sustained effort required
by the pitch servo.

EIS

FLIGHT CONTROL

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Servo motor
control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo gearboxes are equipped with slip-clutches set
to certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency.

PITCH AXIS AND TRIM

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during flight director maneuvers.
Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper control, and sent
to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides this signal to the
pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch servo effort.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim servo may be used to provide manual electric pitch
trim (MEPT). This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control wheel switch rather than the trim
wheel. Manual trim commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated
simultaneously. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.

ROLL AXIS

AFCS

The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight director maneuvers. The
flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and sent to
the roll servo motor.

ENGAGEMENT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use

the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.

APPENDICES

When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot and flight director (if not already active) are activated and the
annunciator lights on the AFCS controller for the autopilot and flight director are illuminated. The flight
director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated.
Autopilot
Engaged

INDEX

Figure 7-27 Autopilot Engaged

Autopilot status is displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated by green ‘AP’.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

409

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

CONTROL WHEEL STEERING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during
the maneuver.
The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.

EIS

Control Wheel Steering

Figure 7-28 CWS Annunciation

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button reengages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to flight
director mode descriptions for specific CWS behavior in each mode.

DISENGAGEMENT

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The autopilot may be manually disengaged by pushing the AP DISC, GA, MEPT Switch, or the AP Key on
the AFCS Control Unit. Manual disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation
and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural alert. The AP DISC or MEPT Switch may be used to cancel the
aural alert.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 7-29 Manual Autopilot Disengagement

AFCS

Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by the
autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC or MEPT Switch.
Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
• System failure

• Stall warning

• Invalid sensor data

• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Roll Trim input

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 7-30 Automatic Autopilot
Disengagement

410

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

LEVEL MODE

Roll

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Level Mode is a coupled pitch and roll mode and is annunciated as both the vertical and lateral modes
when active. Pressing the LVL Key (located on the instrument panel) engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is
disengaged and the aircraft is within the autopilot engagement limitations) in level vertical and lateral modes.
While Level Mode does not track altitude or heading, it will adjust the pitch angle to maintain zero vertical
speed. When the LVL Key is pressed, all armed and active modes are cancelled and the autopilot and flight
director revert to LVL mode for pitch and roll (Figure 7-31). While in level mode, all other modes are available
by pressing the corresponding button.
Pitch

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Command Bars Indicate
Level with the Horizon
Figure 7-31 Level Mode Annunciation

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

411

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

UNDERSPEED PROTECTION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Underspeed Protection is available when the optional Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP) system is
installed and the autopilot is on. It is designed to discourage aircraft operation below minimum established
airspeeds.
When aircraft airspeed decreases to 80 kts, a flashing yellow ‘MINSPD’ annunciation (Figure 7-32) will
appear above the airspeed indicator.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

When the airspeed trend vector reaches a predetermined airspeed (specific to each flap setting), a single
aural “AIRSPEED” will sound, alerting the pilot to the impending underspeed condition.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Airspeed
Indicator

Figure 7-32 MINSPD Annunciation

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

If the aircraft continues to decelerate, Underspeed Protection becomes active. How Underspeed Protection
functions depends on which vertical flight director mode is selected. For the purpose of this discussion, the
vertical flight director modes can be divided into two categories: Those in which it is important to maintain
altitude for as long as possible (altitude-critical modes), and those in which maintaining altitude is less crucial
(non-altitude critical modes).

ALTITUDE-CRITICAL MODES (ALT, GS, GP, TO, GA, FLC)

AFCS

When the aircraft decelerates to stall warning, the lateral and vertical flight director modes will change from
active to armed (Figure 7-33), and the autopilot will provide input causing the aircraft to pitch down and the
wings to level.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Lateral and
Vertical FD
Modes Armed

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 7-33 Lateral and Vertical Flight Director Modes Armed

412

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

An aural “AIRSPEED” alert will sound every five seconds and a red “USP ACTIVE” annunciation (Figure
7-34) will appear to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator. The pitch down force will continue until the
aircraft reaches a pitch attitude at which IAS equals the IAS at which stall warning turns off, plus two knots.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 7-34 Underspeed Protect Active Annunciation

When airspeed increases (as a result of adding power/thrust) to above the IAS at which stall warning turns
off, plus two knots, the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch up until recapturing the vertical reference and
the vertical and lateral flight director modes will change from armed to active.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

NON-ALTITUDE CRITICAL MODES (PIT, VS, VNAV, IAS)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

When the aircraft decelerates to an IAS below the minimum commandable autopilot airspeed, a red “USP
ACTIVE” annunciation (Figure 7-34) will appear to the right of the Vertical Speed Indicator. The vertical
flight director mode will change from active to armed (Figure 7-35), and the autopilot will cause the aircraft
to pitch down until reaching a pitch attitude at which IAS equals the minimum commandable autopilot
airspeed.
Vertical FD
Mode Armed

AFCS

Figure 7-35 Vertical Flight Director Mode Armed

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When airspeed increases (as a result of adding power/thrust) to an IAS above the minimum commandable
autopilot airspeed, the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch up until recapturing the vertical reference and
the vertical flight director mode will change from armed to active.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

413

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.7 EXAMPLE FLIGHT PLAN

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are

for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.

EIS

This scenario-based set of procedures (based on the example flight plan found in the Flight Management
Section) shows various Garmin AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles B.
Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the aircraft
climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following ATC vectors.

21
12

Lamar
VOR
(LAA)

Hays
VOR
(HYS)

Topeka
VOR
(TOP)

V 244

Salina
VOR
(SLN)

V 244
9

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

30
27

KMKC

KCOS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using a GPS flight
plan. The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed
approach is executed.

21
18

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 7-36 Flight Plan Overview

DEPARTURE
AFCS

Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
1) Before takeoff:

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

a) Use the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet.

APPENDICES

b) Push the TO/GA Switch to activate Takeoff Mode. The flight director Command Bars establish a pitch up
attitude to follow.

INDEX

c) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb, holding the pitch angle commanded in Takeoff Mode and
wings level.

414

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change Mode may be used).
a) Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed Mode.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the NOSE UP and
NOSE DN Keys, or pushing the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft, to establish a new Vertical Speed
Reference.

EIS

3) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.

Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

AFCS

TO M
o

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode

KMKC

APPENDICES

4
e

Mod

ode

M
TO

INDEX

Figure 7-37 Departure

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

415

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

INTERCEPTING A VOR RADIAL

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:

EIS

a) Tune the VOR frequency.
b) Press the CDI Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

c) Use the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course to the desired value, 255°. Note that at this point, the flight
director is still in Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly the Selected Heading, 290°.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

d) Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of
the active lateral mode.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.

3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0

AFCS

Hd
29 g
0o

3
Salina
VOR
(SLN)

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

255

NA
V

VO
R

2
HD

VO
R

21
18

APPENDICES

INDEX

Figure 7-38 Intercepting a VOR Radial

416

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE
NOTE: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:

EIS

1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
a) Press the CDI Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation source.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

b) Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight
plan leg.

075

e
V Mod
PS NA

AFCS

Hays
VOR
(HYS)

Salina
VOR
(SLN)

V 244

260

076

d
AV Mo

VOR N

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under GPS guidance. Note that in GPS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 7-39 Transition to GPS Flight Plan

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

417

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

DESCENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

• Flight Level Change descent – Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.

While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for descent:

• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNV flight plan must be entered and enabled.

EIS

• Non-path descent in a VNV scenario – A VNV flight plan is entered and enabled, however Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the VNV Target Altitude prior to reaching the
planned TOD. Flight Level Change Mode is used in the example.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Flight Level Change descent:
1) Select Flight Level Change Mode:
a) Use the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

b) Press the FLC Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears next to the Airspeed
Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed automatically.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Use the NOSE UP and NOSE DN Keys, or push the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft, to adjust the
commanded airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level
Change Mode while the autopilot maintains the current airspeed.

AFCS

3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.

Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode

APPENDICES

FLC

Mod

3
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode

INDEX

Figure 7-40 FLC Descent

418

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNV flight control:
a) Press the VNV Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

b) Use the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude 75 feet below the flight plan’s VNV Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.

EIS

If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 feet below the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director will capture the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active (ALTS
will be armed rather than ALTV).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following

• Press the VNV Key

• Turn the ALT Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNV Target Altitude is indicated by the
white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.

AFCS

The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.

ALT Mode

TOD

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL

2
VPT

APPENDICES

ode

3
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL

BOD

ALT Mode

Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)

INDEX

Along-track Offset, 3 nm before OPSHN
3 nm

Figure 7-41 VPTH Descent

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

419

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Non-path descent using Flight Level Change Mode:
1) Command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next VNV flight plan altitude. Use Flight
Level Change Mode:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

a) Using the ALT Knob to set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case,
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNV flight plan altitudes.

EIS

b) Press the FLC Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off, reset the Selected Altitude
at or below 9000 ft.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

2) Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.

AFCS

4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

5) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.

INDEX

APPENDICES

420

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ALT Mode

Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL

VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
Pla

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Planned
TOD

BOD

sce

ALT Mode

Pa
th
TOD

BOD

ALT Mode

EIS

VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL

Selected Altitude
OPSHN

HABUK

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3 nm

Figure 7-42 Non-path Descent

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

421

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

APPROACH
NOTE: If an approach contains a DME arc, the arc must be flown in Navigation Mode with the AFCS. When

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

receiving vectors from ATC, Navigation Mode must be selected prior to intercepting the ARC.
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.

EIS

a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.

c) The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the autopilot and flight director determine when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The
flight director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.

b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.

3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
AFCS

• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Use the TO/GA Switch to execute a missed approach.

422

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

KCOS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

LOC APR/
GS Mode

3
PETEY

EIS

HD
e
od
M

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

GPS NAV Mode

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

PYNON

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 7-43 ILS Approach to KCOS

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

423

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

a) Make sure the navigation source is set to GPS (use CDI Softkey to change navigation source).
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.

EIS

2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.

4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Use the TO/GA Switch to execute a missed approach.

424

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

KCOS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

EIS

GPS APR/
GP Mode

CEGIX

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2
FALUR

HABUK

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

PYNON

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

GPS NAV Mode

AFCS

Figure 7-44 LPV Approach to KCOS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

425

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
NOTE: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:

EIS

1) Push the TO/GA Switch at the Decision height and apply go around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI also
switches to GPS as the navigation source.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.

3) Use the ALT Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the FLC Key.

As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.

INDEX

APPENDICES

4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box, above the AFCS Status Box.

426

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

MOGAL

EIS

GPS NAV Mode

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

3
2

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

GA Mode

KCOS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 7-45 Go Around/Missed Approach

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

427

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.8 AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

AFCS STATUS ALERTS
The annunciations in Table 7-5 (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFDs above the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized by
criticality.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

AFCS Status
Annunciation

Figure 7-46 AFCS Status Annunciation

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Alert Condition
Elevator Mistrim Down
Elevator Mistrim Up

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pitch Trim Failure
(or stuck MEPT Switch)

Description
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MEPT switches separately to unstick

Roll Failure

Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative

Pitch Failure

Pitch axis control failure; AP inoperative

AFCS

System Failure

Preflight Test
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Annunciation

AP and MEPT are unavailable; FD may still be available
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Do not press the AP DISC Switch during servo power-up and preflight system tests
as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos fail
their power-up tests). Power must be cycled to the servos to remedy the situation.
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure

INDEX

APPENDICES

Table 7-5 AFCS Status Alerts

428

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

OVERSPEED PROTECTION
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in Altitude Hold, Glideslope or Glidepath modes.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Pitch commands are not changed until overspeed protection
becomes active. Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and
maintain the mode reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding Vne.

EIS

When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference
adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Airspeed
Indicator

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 7-47 Overspeed Annunciation

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

429

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM

7.9 ABNORMAL OPERATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SUSPECTED AUTOPILOT MALFUNCTION
NOTE: Consult the aircraft documentation for the location of circuit breakers as well as specifics that may

supplement or amplify this procedure.
If an autopilot failure or trim failure is suspected to have occurred, perform the following steps:

EIS

1) Firmly grasp the control wheel.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press and hold the AP DISC Switch. The autopilot will disconnect and power is removed from the trim motor.
Power is also removed from all primary servo motors and engaged solenoids. Note the visual and aural alerting
indicating autopilot disconnect.
3) Retrim the aircraft as needed. Substantial trim adjustment may be needed.
4) Pull the appropriate circuit breaker(s) to electrically isolate the servo and solenoid components.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) Release the AP DISC Switch.

OVERPOWERING AUTOPILOT SERVOS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

In the context of this discussion, “overpowering” refers to any pressure or force applied to the pitch controls
when the autopilot is engaged. A small amount of pressure or force on the pitch controls can cause the autopilot
automatic trim to run to an out-of-trim condition. Therefore, any application of pressure or force to the
controls should be avoided when the autopilot is engaged.
Overpowering the autopilot during flight will cause the autopilot’s automatic trim to run, resulting in an outof-trim condition or cause the trim to hit the stop if the action is prolonged. In this case, larger than anticipated
control forces are required after the autopilot is disengaged.

AFCS

The following steps should be added to the preflight check:
1) Check for proper autopilot operation and ensure the autopilot can be overpowered.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Note the forces required to overpower the autopilot servo clutches.

430

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry another

source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the G1000 in the PA-44 Seminole include the following:
• Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)

EIS

• SafeTaxi® diagrams
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• Airport Directory

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
• Scheduler
• Flight Data Logging

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) System
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features
on the PFD. SVT imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as
the flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.

AFCS

The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
The AOPA and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directories offer detailed information for a selected airport, such
as available services, hours of operation, and lodging options. Either the AOPA or AC-U-KWIK database may be
installed, but not both simultaneously.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver offers
more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices
and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.

APPENDICES

The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
maintenance phase checks or other events in the Messages Window on the PFD.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
The Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) system discourages aircraft operation outside the normal flight
envelope.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

431

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: SVT requires a terrain database that has a resolution of nine arc-seconds.
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.

SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck.
SVT depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of
view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode (Figure 8‑88). The depicted imagery is
derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second database of
terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that
the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the
operation of SVT. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to
be disabled until the required data is restored.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
The optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS-B) or standard Terrain-SVS is integrated within
SVT to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the
projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.

AFCS

The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Terrain–SVS or TAWS-B terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
• Pathways

• Airport Signs

• Flight Path Marker

• Runway Display

• Horizon Heading Marks

• Terrain Alerting

• Traffic Display

• Obstacle Alerting

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:

432

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery

SVT OPERATION

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch ladder increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.

AFCS

SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The
softkeys are labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to
the previous level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVT feature may be activated.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS,
and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power
is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY
softkeys is remembered by the system.

APPENDICES

• PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• SYN TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HRZN HDG Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

433

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

PFD

SYN VIS

BACK

Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.

BACK

EIS

PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.

Figure 8-2 SVT Softkeys

Activating and deactivating SVT:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.

AFCS

Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.

Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.

APPENDICES

2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.

INDEX

3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.

434

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SVT FEATURES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Airport
Runway

Pathways

Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol

EIS

Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Synthetic
Terrain

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

SVT
Softkeys
Figure 8-3 SVT on the Primary Flight Display

NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation

information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
AFCS

PATHWAYS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored rectangular
boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box size represents 700 feet
wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During an approach, the box width is
700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The height is 200 feet or one half full scale
deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the pathway boxes are displayed is determined by
the selected altitude during climb, cruise, and when the active leg is the final approach course prior to intercepting
the glidepath/glideslope. During a descent (except while on the approach glidepath/glideslope), the pathway boxes
are displayed at the selected altitude, or the VNAV altitude programmed for the active leg in the flight plan, or the
published altitude constraint, whichever is higher (Figure 8-4). Just prior to intercepting the glidepath/glideslope,
the pathway boxes are displayed on the glidepath/glideslope, or the selected altitude, whichever is lower.

APPENDICES

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and navigation
source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes that correspond to
the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a green CDI. An inactive
leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line drawn on the Inset map or
MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
435

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selected
Altitude

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Programmed
Altitudes

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude

AFCS

Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.

Departure and Enroute

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.

INDEX

Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.

436

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Descent and Approach

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 8-5, 8-6). When the flight plan
includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the
selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway

Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway

TOD

AFCS

Selected Altitude
for Step Down

Programmed descent
displayed by pathway

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)

APPENDICES

Figure 8-5 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

437

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Missed Approach

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.

FAF

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Descent displayed
by pathway

Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)

MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway

Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

MAHP

INDEX

Figure 8-6 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding

438

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FLIGHT PATH MARKER

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.

EIS

The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown (Figure 8-7).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Zero Pitch
Line
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Color of
Pathways
match the
CDI color

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
APPENDICES

ZERO PITCH LINE

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.

439

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
HORIZON HEADING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.

TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a

EIS

partial symbol.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in
the Inset map or MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the
SVT display. For more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AIRPORT SIGNS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.

AFCS

Traffic

Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)

Figure 8-8 Airport Signs

440

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not

displayed.

EIS

Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are outlined in white. Other runways will be
outlined in gray. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be
outlined with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft
gets closer to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Other
Runway
on Airport

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Runway
Selected for
Approach

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 8-9 Runways

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

441

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERRAIN-SVS AND TAWS-B ALERTING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the red and yellow X symbols on the Inset Map and MFD map displays. For more
detailed information regarding Terrain-SVS and TAWS-B, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

TERRAIN
Annunciation

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Terrain
Caution

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Potential
Impact
Point

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert

442

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols
found on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with
relative height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset map and MFD moving map
display, obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the
aircraft’s flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000
feet below the aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.

Alert
Annunciation
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Obstacle

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Potential
Impact
Point

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-11 Obstacle Alert
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

443

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FIELD OF VIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Displaying field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Field of
View

Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu

Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option

AFCS

Figure 8-12 Option Menus

3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.

INDEX

APPENDICES

6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

444

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

SVT View on the PFD

Field of View on the MFD

Figure 8-13 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

445

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.2 SAFETAXI

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.

EIS

Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
• Navigation Map Page

• VOR Information Page

• Inset Map (PFD)

• User Waypoint Information Page

• Weather Datalink Page

• Trip Planning Page

• Airport Information Page

• Nearest Pages

• Intersection Information Page

• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• NDB Information Page

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.

446

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Taxiway
Identification
Aircraft
Position

EIS

Airport Hot
Spot Outline

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Airport
Features

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
pressed for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings and
airport feature labels. Pressing the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol, and intersection
names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport runway layout, unless
the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 Softkey cycles back to the original
map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-14 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page

DCLTR Softkey
Removes Taxiway
Markings

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

447

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.

Figure 8-15 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option

3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

SAFETAXI
Option

INDEX

APPENDICES

SafeTaxi
Range
Options

Figure 8-16 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options

448

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SAFETAXI CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.

SafeTaxi Database
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-17 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database

Power-up Page Display

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.

AFCS

Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

449

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-18.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is
shown.
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 14S1, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi

EIS

1 – Indicates the first issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–14 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 10–MAR–14 is the revision date for the next database cycle.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

SafeTaxi Data

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 8-18 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information

450

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8‑18 and 8-19). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue
in the REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8‑19). An expired SafeTaxi
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
Press the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for PFD1. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.

EIS

Figure 8-19 illustrates possible SafeTaxi database conditions that may appear on the AUX - System Status
Page. The EFFECTIVE date is the beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the
effective date, the EFFECTIVE date appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue. The EXPIRES date
is the revision date for the next database cycle. NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

SafeTaxi Database has Expired

SafeTaxi Database Not Installed

AFCS

Current Date is before Effective Date

Figure 8-19 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Database Status

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

451

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

8.3 CHARTVIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the planview
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes (Figure 8-20) are not considered within the chart
boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol
is removed from the display.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Figure 8-20 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading is for
illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Inset Box

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Off-Scale
Area

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Off-Scale
Areas

Figure 8-20 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas

APPENDICES

NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.

The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams

INDEX

• Departure Procedures (DP)

• NOTAMs

• Approaches

452

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, NOTAM,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.

EIS

While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
SHW CHRT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

CHRT OPT

CHRT

INFO

STAR

APR

NOTAM

GO BACK

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.

ALL

HEADER

PLAN

PROFILE

MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN

BACK

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.

Figure 8-21 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

453

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.

Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu

Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu

Figure 8-22 Option Menus

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.

APPENDICES

Figure 8-23 Chart Not Available Banner

INDEX

If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.

Figure 8-24 Unable To Display Chart Banner

454

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.

EIS

Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.

AFCS

Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
From Menu

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick

APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 8-25 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

455

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8‑29). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The
Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the DeKalb Peachtree (KPDK) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page

Figure 8-26 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page

456

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is
within the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is turning onto Taxiway Bravo on the Charlotte,
NC (KCLT) airport.

EIS

Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected
using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information: the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and
Airline Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Aircraft
Current
Position

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-27 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

457

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

In the example shown in Figure 8-27, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-28).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-28 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View

Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Chart Not
To Scale

INDEX

Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-29 Departure Information Page

458

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Chart Not
To Scale

EIS

Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Aircraft Not
Shown Icon

Figure 8-30 Arrival Information Page

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

Figure 8-31 Approach Information Page

459

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such as
METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only when
an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

WX Info
When
Available

WX Softkey
Selected

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-32 Weather Information Page

NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled as shown in Figure 8-32. The
NOTAM Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.

460

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

NOTAM
Softkey
Appears for
Selected
Airports
Figure 8-33 NOTAM Softkey Available

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Local
NOTAM on
This Airport

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

NOTAM
Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-34 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs

INDEX

Pressing the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

461

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-21).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Complete
Chart
Shown

Figure 8-35 Approach Information Page, ALL View

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip

Figure 8-36 Approach Information Page, Header View

462

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

Approach
Chart Plan
View

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-37 Approach Information Page, Plan View

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip

APPENDICES

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

Figure 8-38 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width

463

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-39 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.

464

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-40 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

465

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).

EIS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Available
Information

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full
Screen and Chart
With Info Window

INDEX

Figure 8-41 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window

Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.

466

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Chart Setup Option

Full Screen On/Off Selection

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-42 Page Menus

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

467

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

DAY/NIGHT VIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-43 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑44).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.

AFCS

5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.

INDEX

APPENDICES

6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.

468

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-44 Arrival Information Page, Day View

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 8-45 Arrival Information Page, Night View

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

469

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

CHARTVIEW CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

ChartView Database

Figure 8-46 Power-up Page, ChartView Database

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Power-up Page Display

Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.

Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions

470

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing.
The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.

EIS

Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is shown.
The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 1403, is deciphered as follows:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

14 – Indicates the year 2014
03 – Indicates the third issue of the ChartView database for the year
The EXPIRES date 17–FEB–14 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
The DISABLES date 28–APR–14 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

ChartView
Data

APPENDICES

Figure 8-47 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available

The ChartView database is obtained directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

471

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-48. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database
cycle is no longer viewable. CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicates no ChartView data is available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled

ChartView Database is Disabled

ChartView Database is Not Available

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-48 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Database Status

472

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

8.4 FLITECHARTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area
depicted on some charts.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Departure Procedures (DP)

EIS

Figure 8-49 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on
the published chart. These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the
depicted geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic
position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is
relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Off-Scale
Areas

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Off-Scale
Area

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Area

INDEX

Figure 8-49 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

473

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart
and advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and
GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.

EIS

Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

SHW CHRT

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

CHRT OPT

CHRT

INFO

STAR

APR

GO BACK

Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.

AFCS

ALL

FIT WDTH

FULL SCN

BACK

Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-50 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys

474

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

EIS

3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu

Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu

Figure 8-51 Option Menus

AFCS

When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-52 Chart Not Available Banner

APPENDICES

If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.

INDEX

Figure 8-53 Unable To Display Chart Banner

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

475

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

EIS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.

AFCS

Chart Not
To Scale

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu

APPENDICES

Pan Chart
With the
Joystick

INDEX

Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-54 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection

476

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the G1000 softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE.
Pressing the CHRT Softkey alternates between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
FliteCharts and
Navigation Map Page

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 8-55 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

477

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-54) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-56) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or
INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The Charlotte,
NC airport has three additional charts offering information: the Airport Diagram, Alternate Minimums, and
Take-off Minimums.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Info Box
Selected

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 8-56 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information

478

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

In the example shown in Figure 8-56, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Take-off Minimums and Departure Procedures Chart (Figure 8-57).

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-57 Airport Information Page, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 8-58 Departure Information Page

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

479

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.

Figure 8-59 Arrival Information Page

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.

INDEX

Figure 8-60 Approach Information Page

480

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.

EIS

4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the G1000 softkeys
are blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the
ENT Key to complete the selection.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Info Available
on This Airport

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

WX Info
When
Available

AFCS

Chart Not
To Scale

Figure 8-61 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection

WX Softkey
Selected

APPENDICES

Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

481

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-50).

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Complete
Chart
Shown

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Figure 8-62 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected

482

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
Figure 8-63 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

483

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-64 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window

INDEX

APPENDICES

Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.

484

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Chart Setup Option

Full Screen On/Off Selection

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-65 Page Menus

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

485

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

DAY/NIGHT VIEW

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the G1000 softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-66 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu

3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑67).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.

AFCS

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.

INDEX

APPENDICES

6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.

486

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-67 Approach Information Page, Day View

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 8-68 Approach Information Page, Night View

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

487

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts are disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no
longer available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page
displays the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up
Page displays and the definition of each.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

FliteCharts Database

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-69 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Power-up Page Display

Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.

Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions

INDEX

Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-70. ‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a
date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’ in yellow, indicates charts are
still viewable, but approaching the disable date.

488

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.

EIS

FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is shown.
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 1402, is deciphered as follows:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

14 – Indicates the year 2014
02 – Indicates the second issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 10–FEB–14 is the first date that this database is current.
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 10–MAR–14 is the last date that this database is current.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The DISABLES date 06–SEP–14 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

FliteCharts
Data

INDEX

Figure 8-70 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

489

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The other four possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EFFECTIVE date, in
yellow, indicates the current date preceeds the date the FliteCharts database becomes effective. The EXPIRES
date, in yellow, is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that
this database cycle is no longer viewable. NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate the FliteCharts database is not
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.

FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled

FliteCharts Database is Disabled

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Current Date is Before Effective Date

FliteCharts Database is Not Available

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 8-71 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Datbase Status

490

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

8.5 AIRPORT DIRECTORY

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information
is viewed on the Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO Softkey until INFO-2 is displayed as shown in
Figure 8-72.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.

EIS

Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AIRPORT INFORMATION Page. Initially, information for the airport closest
to the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
3) If necessary, select the INFO softkey until INFO-2 is displayed.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-72 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

491

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Airport Directory databases are revised every 56 days and offered on a subscription basis. Check fly.
garmin.com for the current database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Airport Directory Database

Figure 8-73 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Power-up Page Display

Definition
Normal operation. Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
Airport Directory database has expired.

AFCS

Database card contains no Airport Directory data.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions

492

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-74.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Press the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 14D1, is deciphered as follows:
14 – Indicates the year 2014
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
1 – Indicates the first issue of the Airport Directory database for the year

EIS

The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–14 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 10–MAR–14 is the revision date for the next database cycle.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Airport Directory
Data

AFCS

Figure 8-74 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when
data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in
blue when data is current and in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the
REGION field if Airport Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

493

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

8.6 SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO ENTERTAINMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for
the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services
at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is not available on the GDL 69 Data Link
Receiver.

EIS

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.

NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.

• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver

These IDs are located:
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 8-75)
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)

AFCS

Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
NOTE: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page Group) is used to save GDL 69A

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

activation data when the SiriusXM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal SiriusXM
Radio operation, but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently selected during flight. Refer to the
GDL 69/69A XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev K or later) for further information.
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:

APPENDICES

1) Contact SiriusXM Satellite Radio. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the next to last page in the AUX Page Group.
4) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.

INDEX

5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
6) Press the LOCK Softkey.

494

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Data
Radio ID

Audio
Radio ID

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Weather
Products
Window

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Figure 8-75 XM Information Page

LOCK Softkey
is Used to Save
Activation Data
During Initial Setup

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

RADIO
and INFO
Softkeys

If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM
Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data
Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.

AFCS

USING SIRIUSXM RADIO

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

495

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.

EIS

3) Press the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Active
Channel

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Channel
List

Volume
Field

Categories
Field

AFCS

Figure 8-76 XM Radio Page

ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the SiriusXM
Radio is using.
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:

APPENDICES

1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the CH – Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.

INDEX

2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.

496

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Selecting a channel directly:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel
number.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.

CATEGORY
EIS

The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is PRESETS to view channels that have been programmed.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Selecting a category:
1) Press the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Or:
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Figure 8-77 Categories List
APPENDICES

PRESETS

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.

497

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Setting a preset channel number:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

2) Press the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Pressing the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.

1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).

3) Press the SET Softkey.

EIS

4) Press any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Select PRESETS to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
Select MORE to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels

Select SET
to Save Each
Preset Channel

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-78 Accessing and Selecting XM Preset Channels

Selecting the BACK Softkey, or waiting during 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top
level softkeys.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

VOLUME
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by selecting the VOL Softkey, which
brings up the MUTE Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:

AFCS

1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the VOL Softkey.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)

APPENDICES

Figure 8-79 Volume Control

Radio volume may also be adjusted at each passenger station.
Mute SiriusXM audio:
1) Select the XM Radio Page or XM Information Page.

INDEX

2) Press the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Press the MUTE Softkey again to unmute the audio.

498

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

8.7 SCHEDULER

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, AltimeterTransponder, or Hot Section Inspection or Phase 1 Maintenance Check) in the Messages Window on the PFD.
Messages can be set to display based on a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero
(one-time; default setting), or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set
to periodic alerting automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is
cycled, all messages are retained until deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-80 Scheduler (Utility Page)

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.

AFCS

4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Messages Window and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message type:

• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time

• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)

APPENDICES

• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

499

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.

Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.

EIS

2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message time.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting, the
MSG Softkey flashes. Pressing the MSG Softkey opens the Messages Window and acknowledges the scheduler
message. Pressing the MSG Softkey again removes the Messages Window from the display, and the scheduler
message is deleted from the message queue.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 8-81 PFD Messages Window

500

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

8.8 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.

EIS

Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the G1000 system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the AUX-UTILITY Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the G1000 system is capable of logging.

• Time
• GPS altitude (MSL)
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
• Vertical speed (fpm)
• OAT (degrees C)
• True airspeed (knots)
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)

• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• HSI source

• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level

• Selected course

• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level

• Com1/Com2 frequency

• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)

• Nav1/Nav2 frequency

• Fuel Flow (gph)

• CDI deflection

• Oil Pressure (psi)

• VDI/GP/GS deflection

• Oil Temperature (deg. F)

• Wind Direction (degrees)

• Propeller RPM

• Wind Speed (knots)
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)

APPENDICES

• Ground Speed (kts)

• GPS vertical alert limit

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)

• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)

• GPS horizontal alert limit

AFCS

• GPS vertical speed (fpm)

• GPS fix

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)

• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• Date

• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• Magnetic variation (degrees)

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

501

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in Figure 8-82. This file can be imported
into most computer spreadsheet applications.

Local Date
YYMMDD

Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS

Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)

EIS

log_140210_104506_KIXD.csv

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure 8-82 Log File Format

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Data logging status can be monitored on the AUX-UTILITY Page.

502

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

8.9 ELECTRONIC STABILITY & PROTECTION (ESP™)

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) is an optional feature that is intended to discourage the exceedance of
attitude and established airspeed parameters. This feature will only function when the aircraft is above 200 feet AGL
and the autopilot is not engaged.
ESP engages when the aircraft exceeds one or more conditions (pitch, roll, Vmo, and/or Mmo) beyond the normal
flight parameters. Enhanced stability for each condition is provided by applying a force to the appropriate control
surface to return the aircraft to the normal flight envelope. This is perceived by the pilot as resistance to control
movement in the undesired direction when the aircraft approaches a steep attitude or high airspeed.

EIS

As the aircraft deviates further from the normal attitude and/or airspeed, the force increases (up to an established
maximum) to encourage control movement in the direction necessary to return to the normal attitude and/or
airspeed range. Except in the case of high airspeed, when maximum force is reached, force remains constant up
to the maximum engagement limit. Above the maximum engagement limit, forces are no longer applied. There
is no maximum engagement related to a high airspeed condition.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

When ESP has been engaged for more than ten seconds (cumulative; not necessarily consecutive seconds) of a
20-second interval, the autopilot is automatically engaged with the flight director in Level Mode, bringing the aircraft
into level flight. An aural “Engaging Autopilot” alert is played and the flight director mode annunciation will indicate
‘LVL’ for vertical and lateral modes.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The pilot can interrupt ESP by pressing and holding either the Control Wheel Steering (CWS) or Autopilot
Disconnect (AP DISC) switch. Upon releasing the CWS or AP DISC switch, ESP force will again be applied,
provided aircraft attitude and/or airspeed are within their respective engagement limits. ESP can also be overridden
by overpowering the servo’s mechanical torque limit.
ESP can be enabled or disabled on the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2 Page on the MFD.
To enable or disable ESP™:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.

AFCS

2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
3) If necessary, select the SETUP 2 Softkey to display the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2 Page. If the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2
is already displayed, proceed to step 4.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the STABILITY & PROTECTION field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘ENABLE’ or ‘DISABLE’.

APPENDICES

7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.

ESP is automatically enabled on system power up.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

503

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

ROLL ENGAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Roll Limit Indicators are displayed on the roll scale at 45° right and left, indicating where ESP will engage
(see Figure 8-83). As roll attitude exceeds 45°, ESP will engage and the on-side Roll Limit Indicator will move
to 30°, as shown in Figure 8-84. The Roll Limit Indicator is now showing where ESP will disengage as roll
attitude decreases.

Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)

Figure 8-83 ESP Roll Engagement Indication (ESP NOT Engaged)
ESP Disengage (30°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 46°

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

ESP Engage (45°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 44°

APPENDICES

Before ESP Engage

After ESP Engage

INDEX

Figure 8-84 Roll Increasing to ESP Engagement

504

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Once engaged, ESP force will be applied between 30° and 75°, as illustrated in Figure 8-85. The force
increases as roll attitude increases and decreases as roll attitude decreases. The applied force is intended to
encourage pilot input that returns the airplane to a more normal roll attitude. As roll attitude decreases, ESP
will disengage at 30°.
10º

0º

10º

20º

EIS

90º

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

75º

º
60

60
º

º
45

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

º
30

20º

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Figure 8-85 ESP Roll Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Roll Increases & Decreases as Roll Decreases)

ESP is automatically disengaged if the aircraft reaches the autopilot roll engagement attitude limit of 75°
(Figure 8-86).

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

ESP Upper Disengage Limit (75°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 74°

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 8-86 Roll Attitude Autopilot Engagement Limit (ESP Engaged)

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

505

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

PITCH ENGAGEMENT

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ESP engages at 18° nose-up and 17° nose-down. Once ESP is engaged, it will apply opposing force between
15° and 50° nose-up and between 12° and 50° nose-down, as indicated in Figure 8-87. Maximum opposing
force is applied between 25° and 50° nose-up and between 22° and 50° nose-down.
The opposing force increases or decreases depending on the pitch angle and the direction of pitch travel. This
force is intended to encourage movement in the pitch axis in the direction of the normal pitch attitude range
for the aircraft.

APPENDICES

50˚

45˚

40˚

35˚
30˚

ESP

50˚

25˚

20˚

15˚

10˚

5˚

0˚

5˚

10˚

15˚

20˚

25˚

30˚
35˚

30˚

ESP

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

There are no indications marking the pitch ESP engage and disengage limits in these nose-up/nose-down
conditions.

35˚

40˚

45˚

50˚

Figure 8-87 ESP Pitch Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Pitch Increases & Decreases as Pitch Decreases)

INDEX

HIGH AIRSPEED PROTECTION
Exceeding Vmo or Mmo will result in ESP applying force to raise the nose of the aircraft. When the high
airspeed condition is remedied, ESP force is no longer applied.
506

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

8.10 ABNORMAL OPERATION
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the
PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data

EIS

• Heading data
• GPS position data

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• 9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• Terrain-SVS or TAWS-B function is not available, in test mode, or failed

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.

REVERSIONARY MODE

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD display will
be shown in the interim.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

Figure 8-88 SVT Reversionary Mode

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

507

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES

UNUSUAL ATTITUDES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.

Figure 8-89 Unusual Attitude Display

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.

AFCS

Blue Band

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Terrain
Completely
Fills Display

INDEX

APPENDICES

Figure 8-90 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain

508

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

GDL 69/69A DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to
SiriusXM
• Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
• Ensure that nothing is plugged into the Aux Audio In jack(s) because this would prevent SiriusXM Satellite
Radio from being heard

EIS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Selecting the System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the AUX Page Group).

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure 8-91 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
INDEX

If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

509

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Message

Message Location

CHECK ANTENNA

XM Information Page (MFD)

UPDATING

XM Information Page (MFD))

XM Information Page Weather Datalink Page Loss of signal; signal strength too low for
(MFD)
receiver

EIS

NO SIGNAL

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service
required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code

XM Radio Page (MFD)

Acquiring channel audio or information

OFF AIR

XM Radio Page (MFD)

Channel not in service

--------

XM Radio Page (MFD)

WEATHER DATA LINK FAILED

Weather Datalink Page (MFD)

ACTIVATION REQUIRED

XM Information Page (MFD)

Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
SiriusXM subscription is not activated

DETECTING ACTIVATION

Weather Datalink Page (MFD)

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

WAITING FOR DATA...

SiriusXM subscription is activating.
SiriusXM subscription confirmed downloading
Weather Datalink Page (MFD)
weather data.
Table 8-5 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Messages

510

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
The G1000 Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

• CAS Annunciation Window: The CAS Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text
color is based on alert levels described in the following section. The CAS Annunciation Window is located to the
right of the Altimeter and Vertical Speed Indicator. All aircraft annunciations can be displayed simultaneously
in the Annunciation Window. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from
annunciations that are not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of
the window.

EIS

• MESSAGES Window: The MESSAGES Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages.
Pressing the MSG Softkey displays the MESSAGES Window. Pressing the MSG Softkey a second time removes
the MESSAGES Window from the display. When the MESSAGES Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can be
used to scroll through the alert message list.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the MSG Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation to
accompany an alert. By pressing the softkey when flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged. If alerts
are still present, the MSG label is displayed in white with black text. Pressing the MSG Softkey a second time
views the alert text messages.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is supplied by
a failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the G1000 System Annunciations Section for more information.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

System
Annunciation
(Red ‘X’)

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

CAS Annunciations
Window

MESSAGES
Window

APPENDICES

Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-1 G1000 Alerting System

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

511

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A
• Audio Alerting System: The G1000 System issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met.
See the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information. Should the #1 GIA 63W fail, audio and voice
alerts are not generated. The annunciation tone may be tested from the AUX - System Status Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Press the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:

EIS

a) Press the MENU Key.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.

AFCS

Press to Test
Annunciation Tone
Figure A-2 System Status Page, Annunciation Tone Testing

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

CAS ANNUNCIATIONS

APPENDICES

DISPLAY INHIBITS

INDEX

The following annunciations are configured specifically for the Piper Archer. Red annunciation window
text signifies warnings; yellow, cautions; and white, advisories. See the EIS section for more information on
annunciations. See the POH for recommended pilot actions.

If a GEA or GIA fails, all CAS messages depending on sensors associated with that LRU are automatically
inhibited. Inhibits cannot be activated by invalid sensor data.

Inhibits prevent certain CAS messages from being displayed during the following conditions:
If two alert levels of the same message are active simultaneously (e.g., L FUEL QTY warning and L FUEL
QTY caution) only the higher alert level is displayed.

512

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

WARNING ANNUNCIATIONS
Left Alternator failure
Right Alternator failure
Left engine CHT in warning range
Right engine CHT in warning range
Left fuel quantity in warning range
Right fuel quantity in warning range
Left engine starter motor energized when engine is running
Right engine starter motor energized when engine is running
A failure of a gear system component has been detected
Landing gear are not down and locked or landing gear is selected UP on the
ground
Heater unit has sensed an overheat condition
Underspeed protection is currently engaged

Triple Chime

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

HTR OVERHEAT
USP ACTIVE

Audio Alert

EIS

CHECK GEAR

Description

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Warning Messages
L ALTR FAIL
R ALTR FAIL
L ENG CHT
R ENG CHT
L FUEL QTY
R FUEL QTY
L START ENGD
R START ENGD
GEAR SYS

CAUTION ANNUNCIATIONS
Audio Alert

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Description
Air conditioning condenser door is open during inflight engine failure condition
Left fuel quantity in caution range
Right fuel quantity in caution range
Pitot heat failure
Pitot heat selected OFF
A failure of a gear system component has been detected
Landing gear are not down and locked
Hydraulic pump is running when it should not be running

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Double Chime

AFCS

Caution Messages
AC DOOR OPEN*
L FUEL QTY
R FUEL QTY
PITOT HEAT FAIL
PITOT HEAT OFF
GEAR SYS
CHECK GEAR
HYDR PUMP ON
* Optional

ADVISORY ANNUNCIATIONS
Audio Alert

Single Chime

APPENDICES

Description
Air conditioning condenser door is open
Emergency power in use
Fuel imbalance (left vs. right tank quantity)
PFD display fan is inoperative
MFD display fan is inoperative
Avionics fan fail
Maintenance Mode ON

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Advisory Messages
AC DOOR OPEN*
EMERG BATT ON
FUEL IMBAL
PFD FAN FAIL
MFD FAN FAIL
AV FAN FAIL
MAINT MODE ON
* Optional

SYSTEM MESSAGES

190-01461-01 Rev. A

INDEX

Alerts Window Text
INCOMING CALL
WOW MISCOMPARE
* Optional

Description
Incoming Iridium voice call*

Left and right squat switches do not agree

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

513

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A

G1000 SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
NOTE: Upon power-up, certain windows remain invalid as G1000 equipment begins to initialize. All windows

When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data (refer to Figure A-3 for all possible flags and the responsible LRUs). Refer to the Pilot’s Operating
Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units

GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74A Air
Data Computer
GRS 77 AHRS
OR
GMU 44
Magnetometer

GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
OR
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Unit

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any window continues to remain flagged, the
G1000 System should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.

GDU Software
or Database
Mismatch

AFCS

GDC 74A Air
Data Computer

Figure A-3 G1000 System Failure Annunciations

GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GTX 33 Transponder
OR
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units

The status of detected LRUs can be checked on the AUX - System Status Page (Figure A-2). Active LRUs
are indicated by green check marks; failed, by red ‘X’s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a service center or
Garmin-authorized dealer informed.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Viewing LRU information:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) To place the cursor in the ‘LRU Info’ Box,

APPENDICES

a) Press the LRU Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) With ‘Select LRU Window’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.

INDEX

3) Use the FMS Knob to scroll through the box to view LRU status information.

514

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
Comment

System Annunciation

Comment

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Attitude and Heading
Reference System is aligning.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

System Annunciation

Display system is not receiving
vertical speed input from the
air data computer.

EIS

Display system is not receiving
attitude information from the
AHRS.

AHRS calibration incomplete or
configuration module failure.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Other Various Red X
Indications

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
INDEX

Display system is not receiving
airspeed input from air data
computer.

Display system is not receiving
valid heading input from AHRS.
CDI is not receiving valid data
from the corresponding GIA.
Does not apply when the CDI is
set to GPS.
Display system is not receiving
valid ISA information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid OAT information from air
data computer.
Display system is not receiving
valid transponder information.
Different versions of GDU
software are installed in the
PFD and MFD. This can also
indicate different versions
of the navigation database
installed in the PFD and MFD.
A cross-talk error between the
PFD and MFD will also cause
this annunciation.
A red ‘X’ through any other
display field (such as engine
instrumentation fields)
indicates that the field is not
receiving valid data.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

This annunciation is only seen
when the autopilot is engaged.
The annunciation indicates an
AHRS monitor has detected
an abnormal flight parameter,
possibly caused by strong
turbulence. In this case, the
situation should correct itself
within a few seconds. If there
is an actual failure, a red “X”
soon appears over the Attitude
Indicator.
GPS information is either
not present or is invalid for
navigation use. Note that
AHRS utilizes GPS inputs
during normal operation.
AHRS operation may be
degraded if GPS signals are not
present (see POH).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Display system is not receiving
altitude input from the air data
computer.

Table A-1 G1000 System Annunciations

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

515

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A

G1000 SYSTEM MESSAGE ADVISORIES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

This section describes various G1000 system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU
or an LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red ‘X’ annunciation
as shown previously in the G1000 System Annunciation section.
NOTE: This section provides information regarding G1000 message advisories that may be displayed by the

EIS

system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must
be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The Pilot’s Operating
Handbook (POH) takes precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.

MFD & PFD MESSAGE ADVISORIES

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Message
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name] Key
is stuck.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD [key name] Key
is stuck.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1 configuration
module is inoperative.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage

516

Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFD with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFD are not communicating with each other. The system should be
serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.

The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The MFD and PFD have different software versions installed. The system should be
serviced.
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming
the display. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.

A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing
it several times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The system should be
serviced.
The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

DATABASE MESSAGE ADVISORIES

The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.

The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the
terrain card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists,
the system should be serviced.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.

The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the airport terrain database. Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The airport terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the
specified LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.

APPENDICES

The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem
persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional feature).
Ensure that the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem
persists, the system should be serviced.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to
reload the navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.

EIS

MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts
database error exists.

Comments

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 navigation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database
error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain database
missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport terrain
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.

517

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Airport
Directory database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Airport Directory
database error exists.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation database
mismatch. Xtalk is off.

Comments
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Airport Directory database. Ensure that
the data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

The PFD and MFD have different navigation database versions or regions installed.
Crossfill is off. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or
regions. Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization
function not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off,
then on.
DB MISMATCH – Standby Navigation The PFD and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or regions
database mismatch.
installed. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database
The PFD and MFD have different terrain database versions or regions installed.
mismatch.
Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle database
The PFD and MFD have different obstacle database versions or regions installed.
mismatch.
Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions. Also,
check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function not
completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
DB MISMATCH – Airport Terrain
The PFD and MFD have different airport terrain database versions or regions
database mismatch.
installed. Check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page to determine versions or regions.
Also, check the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page for a database synchronization function
not completed. After synchronization is complete, power must be turned off, then on.
NAV DB UPDATED – Active navigation System has updated the active navigation database from the standby navigation
database updated.
database.
TERRAIN DSP – [PFD1 or MFD1]
One of the terrain, airport terrain, or obstacle databases required for TAWS in the
Terrain awareness display unavailable. specified PFD or MFD is missing or invalid.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

GMA 1347 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 configuration The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory.
error. Config service req’d.
The system should be serviced.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
mismatch. Communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions
service. Return unit for repair.
may still be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The system should be
serviced when possible.

INDEX

APPENDICES

Message
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.

518

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

GIA 63W MESSAGE ADVISORIES

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be
serviced.
EIS

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to
warm up to operating temperature.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should
be serviced.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should
be serviced.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is SBAS capable.

AFCS

The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be
serviced.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The
transmitter is operating at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should
be serviced.

APPENDICES

The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may
still be usable. The system should be serviced when possible.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Comments

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 temperature
too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 temperature
too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs service.
Return the unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GFC software mismatch,
communication halted.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.

519

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk key
is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM1 CONFIG – COM1 config error.
Config service req’d.
COM2 CONFIG– COM2 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST– COM1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST– COM2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS navigation.
Abort approach.
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
TRUE APR – True north approach.
Change HDG reference to TRUE.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.

520

Comments
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
position. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem
persists, the system should be serviced.
COM1 and/or COM2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.

COM1 and/or COM2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.

GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
Vertical guidance generated by SBAS is unavailable, use LNAV only minimums.
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav
angle is set to ‘AUTO’.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The system should be serviced.

A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still
be available. The system should be serviced.
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists,
the system should be serviced.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A

NAV1 and/or NAV2 software mismatch. The system should be serviced.

A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The system
should be serviced.

EIS

A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver
may still be available. The system should be serviced when possible.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs service.
Return unit for repair.

Comments

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Message
MANIFEST – NAV1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – NAV2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.

GEA 71 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Message
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.

The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

GTX 33 MESSAGE ADVISORIES
Comments
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

AFCS

The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
There is no communication with the #1 transponder.
GTX 33ES only. ADS-B is inoperative. The transponder may not be receiving a valid
GPS position. Other transponder functions may be available. Service when possible.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Message
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs service.
Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is inoperative.
XPDR1 ADS-B FAIL – XPDR1 is
unable to transmit ADS-B messages.

Message
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS
relies on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be
serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The system
should be serviced when possible.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.

APPENDICES

GRS 77 MESSAGE ADVISORIES

521

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magnetic-field
model needs update.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far North/
South, no magnetic compass.
MANIFEST – GRS1 software
mismatch, communication halted.

Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model
when practical.
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
flagged as invalid.
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

GMU 44 MESSAGE ADVISORIES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Message
HDG FAULT – AHRS1 magnetometer
fault has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.

Comments
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

GDL 69A MESSAGE ADVISORIES (OPTIONAL)
Comments
GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The system
should be serviced
MANIFEST – GDL software mismatch, The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
communication halted.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Message
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.

GDC 74A MESSAGE ADVISORIES

APPENDICES

Message
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted.

Comments
The GDC 74A has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

GTS 800 MESSAGE ADVISORIES (OPTIONAL)

INDEX

Message
GTS CONFIG – GTS config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTS software mismatch,
communication halted.

522

Comments
GTS 800 configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
system should be serviced.
The GTS 800 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

MISCELLANEOUS MESSAGE ADVISORIES

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

EIS

190-01461-01 Rev. A

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
Comments
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan waypoint Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
is locked.
occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
Or
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new
waypoint moved.
navigation database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint
locations.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
Verify user modified procedures.
edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
Verify stored airways.
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
truncated.
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains
locked flight plan.
locked waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with
current waypoint.
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at waypoint
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
-[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead less Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
than 10 minutes.
10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
than 2 nm.
APR INACTV – Approach is not active. The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate
approach when required.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
frequency for approach.
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
approach.
the correct NAV receiver.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
Bad parallel track geometry.
bad geometry.

523

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Message
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
invalid leg type.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach current
vertical waypoint.

EIS

VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported leg
type in flight plan.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track
angle error.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course
selected.
NON WGS84 WPT – Do not use GPS
navigation to [xxxx].

Comments
Invalid leg type for parallel offset.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path
angle and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next
vertical waypoint.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The position of the selected waypoint [xxxx] is not calculated based on the WGS84
map reference datum and may be positioned in error as displayed. Do not use GPS to
navigate to the selected non-WGS84 waypoint.
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
The G1000 is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device
failed.
should be serviced.
FAILED PATH – A data path has failed. A data path connected to the GDU, GDL 69A, or the GIA 63/W has failed.
MAG VAR WARN – Large magnetic
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for
variance. Verify all course angles.
geographic locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may
differ from the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
SVT – SVT DISABLED:Out of available Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
terrain region.
installed database.
SVT – SVT DISABLED:Terrain DB
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (9 arcresolution too low.
second or better) is not currently installed.
SCHEDULER [#] – .
Message criteria entered by the user.
COURSE SEL – Current track will not
The aircraft is flying away from the selected course and will not intercept.
intercept selected course.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
LOC1 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
degrees.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
degrees.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 REM – Card The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD card
1 was removed. Reinsert card.
needs to be reinserted.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 REM – Card The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the PFD or MFD. The SD card
2 was removed. Reinsert card.
needs to be reinserted.

524

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
Comments
The SD card in the top card slot of the PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the PFD or MFD contains invalid data.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Electronic Stability and Protection has been disabled on the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2
page.
The ESP function has failed and is inoperative. The system should be serviced.
IAS mode of ESP is inoperative. The system should be serviced.

EIS

ESP FAIL – ESP is inoperative.
ESP DEGRADE – ESP IAS mode is
inoperative.
ESP CONFIG – ESP config error.
Config service req’d.

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Message
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 1 ERR – Card
1 is invalid.
[PFD1 or MFD1] CARD 2 ERR – Card
2 is invalid.
ESP OFF – ESP selected off.

The system has detected a problem with the ESP configuration and should be
serviced.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

VOICE ALERTS
The following alerts are announced by the system using a voice of male gender. If an optional terrain system
is installed, voice alerts are also generated (refer to the appropriate terrain alerts section).
Priority

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Voice Alert

Description

Imminent stall is sensed by stall vane
“Airspeed”
Airspeed has exceeded VNE.
Warning
“Minimums, Minimums”
The aircraft has descended below the preset minimum descent altitude
“Check Gear”
Landing gear are not down and locked
“Traffic”
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with the TIS system.
“Traffic, (distance,
Played when a Traffic Advisory (TA) is issued with the optional GTS 800 TAS system. See
Caution
bearing, altitude)”
the Hazard Avoidance section for additional details on GTS 800 voice alerts.
“Check Gear”
Landing gear are not down and locked
“TAS System Test Passed”
Played when the optional GTS 800 traffic system passes a pilot-initiated self test.
“TAS System Test Failed”
Played when the optional GTS 800 traffic system fails a pilot-initiated self test.
“Vertical track”
Advisory Aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent. Issued only when VNAV is enabled.
“TIS Not Available”
The aircraft is outside the Traffic Information Service (TIS) coverage area.
“Timer Expired”
Countdown timer on the PFD has reached zero.
“Stall”

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

525

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A

AFCS ALERTS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

System Status Field

Figure A-4 AFCS System Status Field
The following alert annunciations appear in the AFCS System Status field on the PFD.

EIS

Condition
Pitch Failure

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Roll Failure
Yaw Damper Failure

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pitch Trim Failure
(or stuck MEPT Switch)
System Failure

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Elevator Mistrim Down
Elevator Mistrim Up
Aileron Mistrim Right

AFCS

Aileron Mistrim Left
Rudder Mistrim Right

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Rudder Mistrim Left

APPENDICES

Preflight Test

Annunciation Description
Pitch axis control failure. AP is inoperative.

PTCH
ROLL
YAW
PTRM
AFCS
↓ELE
↑ELE
AIL→
←AIL
RUD→
←RUD
PFT
PFT

Roll axis control failure. AP is inoperative.
YD control failure; AP is inoperative
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MEPT switches separately to unstick
AP and MEPT are unavailable. FD may still be available.

Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction. May indicate a
failure of the pitch trim servo or trim system.

Roll servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction

Yaw servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction. Aircraft rudder
retrim after substantial pitch and power changes required.
Performing preflight system test; aural alert sounds at completion
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure

NOTE: Do not press the AP/YD DISC TRIM INTRPT switch during servo power-up and preflight system tests

INDEX

as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos fail their power-up tests). Power
must be cycled to the servos to remedy the situation.

526

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TERRAIN-SVS ALERTS

TERRAIN

WARNING TERRAIN

“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”

Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)

TERRAIN

WARNING TERRAIN

“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)

TERRAIN

WARNING OBSTACLE

“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)

TERRAIN

WARNING OBSTACLE

“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)

TERRAIN

CAUTION-TERRAIN

“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”

Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)

TERRAIN

TERRAIN AHEAD

“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)

TERRAIN

CAUTION-OBSTACLE

“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”

Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)

TERRAIN

OBSTACLE AHEAD

“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Aural Message

EIS

MFD Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVS Page

Alert Type

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation

* Annunciation is shown on the Terrain-SVS Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.

TERRAIN-SVS SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS

None

“Terrain System Test OK”

Terrain Alerting Inhibited

TER INH

None

No GPS position

TER N/A

NO GPS POSITION

“Terrain System Not Available”†

TER N/A

None

“Terrain System Not Available”†

TER FAIL

TERRAIN FAIL

“Terrain System Failure”

None

TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE

None

System Test pass

Excessively degraded GPS signal; or
Out of database coverage area
Terrain System Test Fail;
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid;
Invalid software configuration; or
System audio fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, TerrainSVS operating with PFD Terrain or
Obstacle databases

INDEX

TERRAIN TEST

APPENDICES

TER TEST

System Test in progress

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Aural Message

AFCS

Terrain-SVS Page Center
Banner Annunciation

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation

Alert Type

* Annunciation is shown on the Terrain-SVS Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
† “Terrain System Available” (in-flight only) when sufficient GPS signal received, or terrain database coverage re-entered.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

527

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A

TAWS-B ALERTS
Annunciations appear on the PFD and the MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD.
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation

MFD Pop-Up Alert (except
TAWS-B Page)

Aural Message

Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)

PULL UP

PULL-UP

“Pull Up”

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)

PULL UP

TERRAIN-PULL-UP

“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”

Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)

PULL UP

TERRAIN AHEAD-PULL-UP

“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)

PULL UP

OBSTACLE AHEAD-PULL-UP

“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull
Up”

Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)

PULL UP

OBSTACLE-PULL-UP

“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”

Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)

TERRAIN

CAUTION-TERRAIN

“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”

Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)

TERRAIN

TERRAIN AHEAD

“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”

Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)

TERRAIN

CAUTION-OBSTACLE

“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”

Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)

TERRAIN

OBSTACLE AHEAD

“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”

Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA)

TERRAIN

TOO LOW-TERRAIN

“Too Low, Terrain”

None

“Five-Hundred”

Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)

TERRAIN

SINK RATE

“Sink Rate”

Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)

TERRAIN

DON’T SINK

“Don’t Sink”

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Alert Type

AFCS

Altitude Callout “500”

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

* Annunciation is shown on the TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.

528

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TAWS-B SYSTEM STATUS ANNUNCIATIONS

TAWS TEST

None

“TAWS System Test OK”

TAWS-B FLTA Alerting Inhibited

TAWS INH

None

No GPS position

TAWS N/A

NO GPS POSITION

“TAWS Not Available”†

TAWS N/A

None

“TAWS Not Available”†

TAWS FAIL

“TAWS System Failure”

None

TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE

None

System Test pass

Excessively degraded GPS signal; or
Out of database coverage area
TAWS-B System Test Fail;
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid;
Invalid software configuration; or
System audio fault
MFD Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, TAWS-B
operating with PFD Terrain or
Obstacle databases

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

TAWS TEST

System Test in progress

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Aural Message

EIS

TAWS-B Page Center Banner
Annunciation

Alert Type

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

* Annunciation is shown on the TAWS-B Page and the Navigation Map Page when Terrain is enabled.
† “TAWS Available” (in-flight only) when sufficient GPS signal received, or terrain database coverage re-entered.

FLIGHT PLAN IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’

APPENDICES

‘File contained user waypoints only.’

Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight plan.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. These
waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans stored in the
system have been modified.
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however others
had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in the system.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. One or
more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can support. The
flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No stored
flight plan data was modified.’
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
‘Flight plan import failed.’
‘Flight plan partially imported.’

AFCS

In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.

529

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX A

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Flight Plan Import/Export Results
Description
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system cannot find
locked.’
in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but must be edited within
the system before it can be activated for use.
‘User waypoint database full. Not all loaded.’ The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored user
waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints on the SD
card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not imported are
locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the system before it can be
activated for use.
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to naming
conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
‘Flight plan export failed.’
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card may not
have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed prematurely.

PILOT PROFILE IMPORT/EXPORT MESSAGES
Description
Displayed if the SD card does not have one or more valid pilot profile filenames.
Displayed if the profile name matches the name of existing profile.
Displayed if the profile name is invalid.
Displayed if the maximum number for pilot profiles has been reached.
Displayed if the importing operation fails for any other reason.
Displayed if the importing operation succeeds.
Displayed if the filename matches the name of an existing file on the SD card.
Displayed if the export operation fails.
Displayed if the export operation succeeds.

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Pilot Profile Import/Export Results
‘No pilot profile plan files found to
import.’
‘Overwrite existing profile?’
‘Profile name invalid. Enter a different
profile name.’
‘All available pilot profiles in use. Delete a
profile before importing another.’
‘Pilot profile import failed.’
‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’
‘Overwrite existing file?’
‘Pilot profile export failed.’
‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’

530

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

DATABASE MANAGEMENT
CAUTION: Never disconnect power to the system when loading a database. Power interuption during the

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

database loading process could result in maintenance being required to reboot the system.
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations,
SD cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen navigation and ChartView database updates. Not
all SD cards are compatible with the G1000. Use only SD cards supplied by Garmin or the aircraft manufacturer.

EIS

CAUTION: When downloading updates to the Jeppesen Navigation Database, copy the data to an SD card

other than a Garmin Supplemental Data Card. Otherwise, data corruption can occur.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

NOTE: When loading database updates, the ‘DB Mismatch’ message will be displayed until database

synchronization is complete, followed by turning system power off, then on. Synchronization can be
monitored on the AUX-SYSTEM STATUS Page.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the

power-up screen and the effective date on the AUX-System Status Page being displayed in yellow.
NOTE: The FAA has asked Garmin to remind pilots who fly with Garmin database-dependent avionics of the

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

following:
• It is the pilot’s responsibility to remain familiar with all FAA regulatory and advisory guidance and information
related to the use of databases in the National Airspace System.

AFCS

• Garmin equipment will only recognize and use databases that are obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen. Databases
obtained from Garmin or Jeppesen are assured compliance with all data quality requirements (DQRs) by virtue
of a Type 2 Letter of Authorization (LOA) from the FAA. A copy of the Type 2 LOA is available for each database
and can be viewed at http://fly.garmin.com by selecting ‘Type 2 LOA Status.’

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• Use of a current Garmin or Jeppesen database in your Garmin equipment is required for compliance with
established FAA regulatory guidance, but does not constitute authorization to fly any and all terminal procedures
that may be presented by the system. It is the pilot’s responsibility to operate in accordance with established
AFM(S) and regulatory guidance or limitations as applicable to the pilot, the aircraft, and installed equipment.
NOTE: The pilot/operator must review and be familiar with Garmin’s database exclusion list as discussed

APPENDICES

impact on the intended aircraft operation. The database alerts can be viewed at www.flygarmin.com by
selecting ‘Aviation Database Alerts.’

INDEX

NOTE: If the pilot/operator wants or needs to adjust the database, contact Garmin Product Support to

coordinate the revised DQRs.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

531

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX B

NOTE: Garmin requests the flight crew report any observed discrepancies related to database information.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

JEPPESEN DATABASES

EIS

The Jeppesen navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The ChartView database is updated on a
14-day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will
no longer function. Both of these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen.
NOTE: The Jeppesen aviation navigation database is now referred to as the ‘navigation database’. Previously

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

this database had been referred to as the ‘aviation database’.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The ChartView database should be copied to the Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside
in the bottom card slot on the MFD. The navigation database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user
supplied SD data card. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update information.
NOTE: After the navigation database is installed, the card may be removed.

Updating the active Jeppesen navigation database (not using the Dual Navigation Database or
Automatic Database Synchronization Features):

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the navigation database update into the top card slot of the
display (PFD or MFD) to be updated (label of SD card facing left).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

2) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed in the upper left corner of the display:

Figure B-1: Standby Navigation Database Prompt

INDEX

APPENDICES

3) Press the NO Softkey to proceed to the active database update.
4) A prompt similar to the following is displayed, press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation
database.

532

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

Figure B-2 Database Update Confirmation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

5) After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode. Do not remove power while the display is
starting.
6) Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card from the top card slot.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

7) Repeat steps 1 through 6 for the other display (PFD1 or MFD). Remove the SD card when finished.
8) Apply power to the system and press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
9) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
10) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

11) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show active navigation database information for each display (MFD1
DB, PFD1 DB). Verify the correct active navigation database cycle information is shown for each display.

DUAL NAVIGATION DATABASE FEATURE

AFCS

The dual navigation database feature allows each display to store an upcoming navigation database on the
bottom SD card so that the system can automatically load it to replace the active database when the new
database becomes effective (the next cycle becomes available seven days prior to its effective date).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

If a navigation database loader card is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and an SD card is in the
bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (upon on-ground power up) as to whether the database should
be stored on the bottom SD card as the standby database. If the user responds affirmatively, the system will
copy the navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card. As long as the bottom SD card
remains in the card slot, this standby navigation database will be available for the system to use as the active
database as soon as it becomes effective.

APPENDICES

The system checks the active and standby databases upon (on-ground only) power-up. If the standby
database is current and the active database is out of date, the display will upload the standby database
into the active internal database location. Uploading the standby database to the active location takes
approximately 45-55 seconds. The pilot is alerted that the update is complete by a system alert message,
‘NAV DB UPDATED’.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

533

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Loading a standby navigation database:

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

APPENDIX B

2) Verify that an SD card is inserted in the bottom slot of the PFD and the MFD.

1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the new navigation database version into the top card slot
of the MFD.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

3) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed.

Figure B-3 Standby Navigation Database Prompt

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

4) Press the YES Softkey. The navigation database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

5) After the navigation database files are copied to the bottom SD card, the display will appear as shown in Figure
B-4.

Figure B-4 Standby Navigation Database Update Complete

APPENDICES

6) As instructed on the display, press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in Figure B-5.

INDEX

Figure B-5 Navigation Database Verification Prompt

534

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

7) Press any key to continue. The display will now appear as shown in Figure B-6.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS

Figure B-6 Active Navigation Database Prompt

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

8) Press the NO Softkey. The display now starts in normal mode. Since the database effective date is not yet valid,
it should not be loaded as the active database. The display now starts in normal mode. Do not remove power
while the display is starting.
9) Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

11) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
12) The new database is copied to the SD card in the bottom card slot of the PFD. Progress can be monitored in the
SYNC STATUS field. When copying is finished, ‘Complete’ is displayed.
13) Turn system power OFF.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

14) Remove the SD card from the top card slot of the MFD.
15) Turn system power ON.
16) Press the ENT Key to acknowledge the startup screen.
17) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.

AFCS

18) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

19) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show standby navigation database information for each display
(MFD1 DB, PFD1 DB). Verify the correct standby navigation database cycle information is shown for each
display.
NOTE: The system compares the active databases on the PFD and the MFD, and displays a system alert

message ‘DB Mismatch’ if they are not identical. Similarly, if the standby databases on the PFD and the MFD
are not identical, the system will display a ‘DB Mismatch’ alert for the standby navigation databases.

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

535

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX B

GARMIN DATABASES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
• Expanded basemap

• Airport terrain

• SafeTaxi

• Terrain

• Obstacle

• FliteCharts

• Airport Directory
(AOPA)

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded and ultimately
stored on three Supplemental Data Cards. Each Supplemental Data Card resides in the bottom card of each
display as shown in Figure B-7. These cards must not be removed except to update the databases stored on
each card.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

PFD1

MFD

Figure B-7 Correct Database Locations

AFCS

Since these databases are not stored internally in the displays, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical
database versions must be kept in each display unit.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. The airport terrain database contains increased
resolution terrain data around airports. These databases are updated periodically and have no expiration date.

APPENDICES

The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin

INDEX

accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.

536

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S. or
worldwide, respectively. The AOPA Directory offers detailed information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along
with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. These databases are updated every 56 days. The
AC-U-KWIK Directory offers detailed information for more than 8,000 airports with runways longer than 3,000
feet worldwide.
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.

EIS

The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.

AUTOMATIC DATABASE SYNCHRONIZATION FEATURE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The automatic database synchronization feature automatically transfers the database from a single
SD database card to the SD cards on the PFD and the MFD to ensure that all databases are synchronized
throughout the system. After power-up, the system compares all copies of each applicable database. If similar
databases do not match, the most recent valid database is automatically copied to each card in the system that
does not already contain that database.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

The following databases are checked and synchronized: Basemap, SafeTaxi, Airport Terrain, Obstacle, and
Airport Directory (AOPA or AC-U-KWIK). This feature applies only to databases that are stored on the
Supplemental Data Card that resides in the bottom slot of each display. This feature does not apply to
the active navigation database which is stored internally in each display, the terrain database, or the charts
databases (FliteCharts and ChartView), which are only required to be present on the MFD.. The typical
procedure would be to download new databases to the MFD card, then synchronize the data to the PFD.
NOTE: The 9-arc second terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this method.

Therefore the user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the system to a ground power
source while performing the database synchronization.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The synchronization progress may be monitored on the AUX-System Status Page in the Sync Status section
of the Database Window (Figure B-8). This section shows the synchronization status of each applicable
database, including the percent complete, time remaining, and to which displays the databases are being
copied. When the synchronization is complete, the status is listed as ‘Complete’, followed by the displays to
which the databases were copied. This sub-section is only present when a sync is occurring or has occurred
on the current power-up.

APPENDICES

An indication of ‘Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized databases will be used by
the system.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

537

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX B

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure B-8 AUX-System Status Page, Database Window

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The Display Database Softkey (Figure B-11) is used to place the cursor in the Database Window. Upon
first press of the Display Database Softkey, the softkey will change to a selected state (black text on gray
background) and the cursor will appear in the Database Window. At this point the user can scroll through
all databases in the Database Window to view status information. If the Display Database Softkey is pressed
repeatedly, the softkey will switch between PFD1 and MFD1. Database status information in the Database
Window will reflect the database of the selected PFD or MFD. After a successful sync and restart, verify that
the proper databases are now in use on the AUX–System Status Page (Figure B-8).

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

If an error occurs during the synchronization, an error message will be displayed, followed by the affected
display in the Sync Status section of the Database Window (Figure B-9). If a synchronization completes on
one display, but an error occurs on another, the error message will be displayed with the affected diaplay
listed after it. When an error message (Table B-1) is displayed, the problem must be corrected before the
synchronization can be completed. A power cycle is required to restart synchronization when ‘Card Full’ or
‘Err’ is shown.

Database Synchronization Error Message
APPENDICES

Figure B-9 Synchronization Error Message

INDEX

Error Message
Canceled
Card Full
Err
Timeout

Description
Database synchronization has been canceled by removing the bottom SD card in display being updated
SD card does not contain sufficient memory
Displayed for all other errors that may cause the synchronization process to be halted
System timed-out prior to the database transfer completing
Table B-1 Database Synchronization Error Messages

538

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

UPDATING GARMIN DATABASES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the new
databases onto an existing Supplemental Data Card. Equipment required to perform the update is as follows:
• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000, Windows XP, Vista, or Windows 7))
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website

EIS

• Existing Supplemental Database SD Cards (010-00330-42, or -43) from the PFD and MFD

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.

UPDATING BASEMAP, SAFETAXI, AIRPORT TERRAIN, OBSTACLE, AND AIRPORT DIRECTORY
DATABASES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

These databases may be copied to one Supplemental Data Card, then automatically synchronized to other
card in the system:
1) With system power OFF, remove the MFD database card from the bottom card slot of the MFD.
2) Update the basemap, SafeTaxi, airport terrain, obstacle and/or airport directory databases on the MFD card.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Insert the MFD database card into the bottom card slot of the MFD.
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen
(Figure B-10). If a ‘Verifying’ message is seen, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to step 5.

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

Figure B-10 Database Information on the Power-up Screen
INDEX

5) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

539

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

APPENDIX B

9) Remove and reapply power to the system.

8) Monitor the Sync Status in the Database Window. Wait for all databases to complete synching, indicated by
‘Complete’ being displayed as seen in Figure B-9.
10) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
11) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.

EIS

12) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1 DB, PFD1
DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.

Unselected

MFD1 DB Selected PFD1 DB Selected

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure B-11 Display Database Softkey

UPDATING TERRAIN, FLITECHARTS, AND CHARTVIEW DATABASES

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) With system power OFF, remove the Supplemental Data Card from the bottom card slot of the MFD and PFD.
2) Copy the updated terrain database to both Supplemental Data Cards. Copy the updated FliteCharts or ChartView
database to one Supplemental Data Card.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

3) Insert the updated Supplemental Data Cards into the bottom card slot of the MFD and PFD. The Supplemental
Data Card containing the FliteCharts or ChartView database is inserted in the MFD.
4) Apply power to the system, check that the databases are initialized and displayed on the power-up screen
(Figure B-10). A ‘Verifying’ message may be seen. If this message is present, wait for the system to finish
loading before proceeding to step 5.
5) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.

AFCS

6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

8) Press the Display Database Selection Softkey to show database information for each display (MFD1 DB, PFD1
DB). Verify the correct database cycle information is shown for each database for each display.

INDEX

APPENDICES

9) Remove power from the system.

540

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

MAGNETIC FIELD VARIATION DATABASE UPDATE

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

A copy of the current magnetic field variation database (MV DB) is included with the navigation database.
At startup, the system compares this version of the MV DB with that presently being used by each AHRS
(GRS1 and GRS2). If the system determines the MV DB needs to be updated, a prompt is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page, as shown in Figure B-12. Note, in the following example, GRS1 is the first AHRS to
indicate an update is available. In actuality, this is dependent on which AHRS is the first to report status to the
system. GRS2 may be displayed before GRS1. The order is not important, only that both AHRS be updated.

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Figure B-12 GRS1 Magnetic Field Variation Database Update Prompt

Loading the magnetic field variation database update:

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

1) With ‘OK’ highlighted, as seen in Figure B-12, press the ENT Key on the MFD. A progress monitor is displayed
as shown in Figure B-13. When the upload is complete, the system is ready for use.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Figure B-13 Uploading Database to GRS1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

541

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX B

Blank Page

542

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX C
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

GARMIN AVIATION GLOSSARY

INDEX

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

APPENDICES

Degrees Celsius
Center Runway
Course to Altitude Leg
Calibrated
Calculator
Indicated airspeed corrected for
installation and instrument errors.
Crew Alerting System
Course to DME Distance Leg
Course Deviation Indicator
Control Display Unit
Course to Fix Leg
Channel
Cylinder Head Temperature
Checklist

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

°C
C
CA
CAL
CALC
Calibrated
Airspeed
CAS
CD
CDI
CDU
CF
CH, CHNL
CHT
CHKLIST

AFCS

BFO
BKSP
BRG

Both Runways
Barometric Altitude
Barometer, Barometric
Battery
Backcourse
The compass direction from the present
position to a destination waypoint.
Beat Frequency Oscillator
Backspace
Bearing

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

B
B ALT
BARO
BATT
BC
Bearing

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Airspeed
Aviation Support Branch
Automated Surface Observing System
Air Traffic Control
ATC Radar Beacon System
Automatic Terminal Information Service
Along Track
Automatic Sequence
Auxiliary
Average
Automated Weather Observing System

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

190-01461-01 Rev. A

AS
ASB
ASOS
ATC
ATCRBS
ATIS
ATK
AUTOSEQ
AUX
AVG
AWOS

EIS

AF
AFCS
AFM
AFMS
AFRM
AGL
AHRS
AIM
AIRMET
AIRREP
ALRT
ALT
ALT, ALTN
ALTS
ALTV
AMPS
ANNUNC
ANT
AOA
AOG
AOPA
AP
AP DISC
APPR, APR
APT
APTSIGNS
ARINC
ARSPC
ARTCC
ARV

Accuracy
Active, Activate, Altitude Compensated Tilt
Air Data Computer
Automatic Direction Finder
Attitude Direction Indicator
Air Defense Identification Zone
Automatic Dependent SurveillanceBroadcast
Arc to Fix Leg
Automatic Flight Control System
Airplane Flight Manual
Airplane Flight Manual Supplement
Airframe
Above Ground Level
Attitude and Heading Reference System
Aeronautical Information Manual
Airman’s Meteorological Information
Air Reports
Alert
Altitude
Alternator
Selected Altitude Capture Mode
VNAV Altitude Capture Mode
Amperes
Annunciation
Antenna
Angle of Attack
Aircraft On Ground
Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association
Autopilot
Autopilot Disconnect
Approach
Airport, Aerodrome
Airport Signs
Aeronautical Radio Incorporated
Airspace
Air Route Traffic Control Center
Arrival

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ACC
ACT, ACTV
ADC
ADF
ADI
ADIZ
ADS-B

543

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX C

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

CI
CLD
CLR
CM
CN
CNS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

CO
COM
CONFIG
COOL
COPLT
Course

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Course to
Steer

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

CPDLC
CPL
CR
CRG
CRNT
Crosstrack
Error
CRS
CRSR
CSC
CTA
CTR
CTRL
Cumulative,
CUM
CVR
CVRG
CWS
CYL

INDEX

D ALT
DB, DBASE

544

Course to Intercept Leg
Cloud
Clear
Centimeter
Canada
Communication, Navigation, &
Surveillance
Carbon Monoxide
Communication Radio
Configuration
Coolant
Copilot
The line between two points to be
followed by the aircraft.
The recommended direction to steer
in order to reduce course error or stay
on course. Provides the most efficient
heading to get back to the desired course
and proceed along the flight plan.
Controller Pilot Datalink Communications
Couple
Course to Radial Leg
Cockpit Reference Guide
Current
The distance the aircraft is off a desired
course in either direction, left or right.
Course, Course to Steer
Cursor
Current Speed Control
Control Area
Center
Control
The total of all legs in a flight plan.
Cockpit Voice Recorder
Coverage
Control Wheel Steering
Cylinder
Density Altitude
Database

dBZ
DCLTR, DECLTR
DEC FUEL
DEG
DEIC, DEICE
DEP
Desired Track
DEST
DEV
DF
DFLT
DG
DGRD
DH
Dilution of
Precision
DIR
DIS
Distance
DME
DN
DOP
DP
DPRT
DR
DSBL
DTK
E
ECU
Efficiency
EGNOS
EGT
EIS

Decibels ‘Z’ (Radar Return)
Declutter
Decrease Fuel
Degree
De-icing
Departure
The desired course between the active
“from” and “to” waypoints.
Destination
Deviation
Direct to Fix Leg
Default
Directional Gyro
Degrade
Decision Height
A measure of GPS satellite geometry
quality on a scale of one to ten (lower
numbers equal better geometry, where
higher numbers equal poorer geometry).
Direction
Distance
The ‘great circle’ distance from the
present position to a destination
waypoint.
Distance Measuring Equipment
Down
Dilution of Precision
Departure Procedure
Departure
Dead Reckoning
Disabled
Desired Track
Empty, East
Engine Control Unit
A measure of fuel consumption,
expressed in distance per unit of fuel.
European Geostationary Navigation
Overlay Service
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Engine Indication System

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX C
Elevation, Elevator
Emergency

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS

Glideslope
Go-Around
Gallon(s)
Gearbox
Ground Clutter Suppression
Garmin Air Data Computer
Garmin Display Unit
Garmin Engine/Airframe Unit
Geographic
Garmin Flight Control
Garmin Integrated Avionics Unit
Garmin Audio Panel System
Garmin Mode Controller

APPENDICES
INDEX

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

G/S
GA
GAL, GL
GBOX
GCS
GDC
GDU
GEA
GEO
GFC
GIA
GMA
GMC

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Degrees Fahrenheit
Course From Fix to Altitude Leg
Federal Aviation Administration
Final Approach Fix
Failure
Course From Fix to Distance Leg
Federal Communication Commission
Forecast

Flight Director, Course From Fix to DME
Distance Leg
FDE
Fault Detection and Exclusion
FF, FFLOW
Fuel Flow
FIS-B
Flight Information Services-Broadcast
FISDL
Flight Information Service Data Link
FL
Flight Level
FLC
Flight Level Change
FM
Course From Fix to Manual Termination
Leg
FMS
Flight Management System
FOB
Fuel On Board
FOD
Fuel Over Destination
FPA
Flight Path Angle
FPL
Flight Plan
FPM
Feet Per Minute, Flight Path Marker
FREQ
Frequency
FRMT
Format
FRZ
Freezing
FSS
Flight Service Station
FT
foot/feet
Fuel Flow
The fuel flow rate, expressed in units of
fuel per hour.
Fuel On Board The total amount of usable fuel on board
the aircraft.
FWD
Forward

EIS

°F
FA
FAA
FAF
FAIL
FC
FCC
FCST

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Electromagnetic Interference
Endurance
Flight endurance, or total possible flight
time based on available fuel on board.
ENG
Engine
ENGD
Engaged
ENR
Enroute
Enroute Safe The recommended minimum altitude
Altitude
within ten miles left or right of the desired
course on an active flight plan or directto.
ENT
Enter
EPE
Estimated Position Error
EPU
Estimated Position Uncertainty
ERR
Error
ESA
Enroute Safe Altitude
ESP
Electronic Stability and Protection
Estimated
A measure of horizontal GPS position
Position Error error derived by satellite geometry
conditions and other factors.
Estimated
The estimated time at which the aircraft
Time of Arrival should reach the destination waypoint,
based upon current speed and track.
Estimated
The estimated time it takes to reach
Time Enroute the destination waypoint from the
present position, based upon current
groundspeed.
ETA
Estimated Time of Arrival
ETE
Estimated Time Enroute
EXPIRD
Expired

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

ELEV
EMER, EMERG,
EMERGCY
EMI
END, ENDUR
Endurance

545

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX C

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

GMT
GMU
GND
GPH
GPN
GPS
GPWS
Grid MORA

Groundspeed

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Ground Track
GRS
GS
GSA
GSL
GTS
GTX
GWX

AFCS

HA
HDG
HDOP
Heading

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

INDEX

APPENDICES

HFOM
Hg
HI
HI SENS
HM
Horizontal
Figure of
Merit
hPa
HPL

546

Greenwich Mean Time
Garmin Magnetometer Unit
Ground
Gallons per Hour
Garmin Part Number
Global Positioning System
Ground Proximity Warning System
Grid Minimum Off-Route Altitude; One
degree latitude by one degree longitude
in size and clears the highest elevation
reference point in the grid by 1,000 feet
for all areas of the grid or 2,000 feet for
mountainous
The velocity that the aircraft is travelling
relative to a ground position.
See Track
Garmin Reference System
Ground Speed, Glideslope
Garmin Servo Adapter
Geodetic Sea Level
Garmin Traffic System
Garmin Transponder
Garmin Weather Radar
Hold Terminating at Altitude Leg
Heading
Horizontal Dilution of Precision
The direction an aircraft is pointed,
based upon indications from a magnetic
compass or a properly set directional gyro.
High Frequency, Hold Terminating at Fix
Leg
Horizontal Figure of Merit
Mercury
High
High Sensitivity
Hold with Manual Termination Leg
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s horizontal position.
Hectopascal
Horizontal Protection Level

HR
HRZN HDG
HSDB
HSI
HT
HUL
Hz

Hour
Horizon Heading
High-Speed Data Bus
Horizontal Situation Indicator
heat
Horizontal Uncertainty Level
Hertz (cycles per second)

I
IAF
IAS
IAT
IAU
ICAO
ICS
ID
IDENT, IDNT
IF
IFR
IG
ILS
IMC
IN
INACTV
INC FUEL
IND
Indicated

Inner Marker
Initial Approach Fix
Indicated Air Speed
Indicated Air Temperature
Integrated Avionics Unit
International Civil Aviation Organization
Intercom System
Identification/Morse Code Identifier
Identification
Initial Fix
Instrument Flight Rules
Imperial Gallon
Instrument Landing System
Instrument Meteorological Conditions
Inch
Inactive
Increase Fuel
Indicator, Indicated
Information provided by properly
calibrated and set instrumentation on the
aircraft panel.
Information
Inches of Mercury
Intersection(s)
Integrity (RAIM unavailable)
Infrared Data Association
International Standard Atmosphere
Interstage Turbine Temperature, InterTurbine Temperature

INFO
IN Hg
INT
INTEG
IrDA, IRDA
ISA
ITT

KEYSTK
KG

Key Stuck
Kilogram

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX C
Kilohertz
Kilometer
Knot

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

North
Navigation
Navigation Aid
Non-Directional Beacon
Next Generation Radar

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

190-01461-01 Rev. A

N
NAV
NAVAID
NDB
NEXRAD

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

M
Meter, Middle Marker
MMO (VMO)
Maximum Speed
Mach Number Mach number is the ratio of the true
airspeed to the speed of sound.
MAG
Magnetic
MAG VAR
Magnetic Variation
MAHP
Missed Approach Hold Point

MSG
MSL
MT, M
mV
MVFR

MKR
MOA
MON
MOV
MORA
MPEL
MPM
MSA
MSAS

EIS

Left, Left Runway
Latitude
Label
Pound
Liquid Crystal Display
Local
Light Emitting Diode
The amount of fuel remaining on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to.
Left Over Fuel The amount of flight time remaining,
Reserve
based on the amount of fuel on board
after the completion of one or more legs
of a flight plan or direct-to, and a known
consumption rate.
Leg
The portion of a flight plan between two
waypoints.
LGND
Legend
LIFR
Low Instrument Flight Rules
LNAV
Lateral Navigation
LO
Low
LOC
Localizer
LOI
Loss of Integrity (GPS)
LON
Longitude
LPV
Localizer Performance with Vertical
Guidance
LRU
Line Replaceable Unit
LT
Left
LTNG
Lightning
LVL
Level

Manifold Pressure (inches Hg)
Manual Squelch
Missed Approach Point
Master Avionics Squelch
Maximum
Maximum Speed (overspeed)
Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude
Manual Electric Pitch Trim
Manual Electric Trim
Aviation Routine Weather Report
Multi Function Display
Multi Function Window
Military Grid Reference System
Megahertz
Microphone
Minimum
Uses Grid MORAs to determine a safe
altitude within ten miles of the aircraft
present position.
Marker Beacon
Military Operations Area
Monitor
Movement
Minimum Off-Route Altitude
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level
Meters per Minute
Minimum Safe Altitude
Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation
System
Message
Mean Sea Level
Meter
Millivolt(s)
Marginal Visual Flight Rules

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

L
LAT
LBL
LB
LCD
LCL
LED
Left Over Fuel
On Board

MAN IN
MAN SQ
MAP
MASQ
MAX
MAXSPD
MDA
MEPT
MET
METAR
MFD
MFW
MGRS
MHz
MIC
MIN
Minimum Safe
Altitude

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

kHz
KM
KT

547

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX C

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NM
NoPT

548

NOTAM
NRST

Nautical Mile(s)
No Procedure Turn Required (procedure
shall not be executed without ATC
clearance)
Notice To Airman
Nearest

O
OAT
OBS
OFST
OXY

Outer Marker
Outside Air Temperature
Omni Bearing Selector
Offset
Oxygen

P ALT
PA
PASS
PC
PFD
PI
PIREP
PIT, PTCH
POH
POHS
POS, POSN
PPH
PPM
P. POS
PRES, PRESS
PROC
PROP
PROX
PSI
PT
PTK
PTT
PWR

Pressure Altitude
Passenger Address, Proximity Advisory
Passenger(s)
Personal Computer
Primary Flight Display
Procedure Turn to Course Intercept Leg
Pilot Report
Pitch
Pilot’s Operating Handbook
Pilot’s Operating Handbook Supplement
Position
Pounds per Hour
Parts per Million
Present Position
Pressure
Procedure(s), Procedure Turn
Propeller
Proximity
Pounds per Square Inch
Procedure Turn
Parallel Track
Push-to-Talk
Power

QTY

Quantity

R
RA
RAD
RA, RAD ALT
RAIM
RAM
RAT
RCVR
REF
REM
REQ
RES
REV
RF
RMI
RMT
RNAV
RNG
RNP
RNWY, RWY
ROL
ROM
RPM
RST FUEL
RSV
RT
RVRSNRY
RX

Right, Right Runway
Resolution Advisory, Radio Altimeter
Radial
Radio Altimeter
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring
Random Access Memory
Return Air Temperature
Receiver
Reference
Remaining (fuel remaining), Reminder
Required
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Reverse, Revision, Revise
Radio Frequency, Constant Radius Turn to
Fix Leg
Radio Magnetic Indicator
Remote
Area Navigation
Range
Required Navigation Performance
Runway
Roll
Read Only Memory
Revolutions Per Minute
Reset Fuel
Reserve (fuel reserve entered by pilot)
Right
Reversionary
Receive

S
SA
SAT
SBAS
SCIT
SD
SEC
SEL, SLCT
SENS

South
Selective Availability
Static Air Temperature
Satellite-Based Augmentation System
Storm Cell Identification and Tracking
Secure Digital
Second(s)
Select
Sense

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX C

APPENDICES
INDEX

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Velocity (airspeed)

AFCS

V, Vspeed

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Unavailable
United States
User
Coordinated Universal Time
Universal Transverse Mercator/ Universal
Polar Stereographic Grid

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

190-01461-01 Rev. A

UNAVAIL
US
USR
UTC
UTM/UPS

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

TRUE
Traffic Advisory
Tactical Air Navigation System
Terminal Aerodrome Forecast
True Airspeed, Traffic Advisory System
Total Air Temperature
Terrain Awareness and Warning System

Track Angle
Error
TRK
TRSA
TRUNC
TTL
TURB
TURN
TX

Terminal Control Area
Traffic Alert Collision Avoidance System
Telephone
Temperature
Terminal
Track Between Two Fixes Leg
Temporary Flight Restriction
Target
True Heading
Traffic Information Service
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Track Angle Error
Terminal Maneuvering Area
Timer/Reference
Top of Climb
Top of Descent
Take-Off, Go-Around
Topographic
Total
Direction of aircraft movement relative to
a ground position; also ‘Ground Track’.
The angle difference between the desired
track and the current track.
Track
Terminal Radar Service Area
Truncated
Total
Turbulence
Procedure Turn
Transmit

EIS

T
TA
TACAN
TAF
TAS
TAT
TAWS

TCA
TCAS
TEL
TEMP
TERM
TF
TFR
TGT
T HDG
TIS
TIT
TKE
TMA
TMR/REF
TOC
TOD
TOGA, TO/GA
TOPO
TOT
Track

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Surface
Standard Instrument Approach Procedures
Standard Instrument Departure
SIGMET/AIRMET
Significant Meteorological Information
Simulator
Supercooled Large Droplet
Slip/Skid
Symbol
Space
Speed
Special Position Identification
Speaker
Squelch
Service
Stabilization
Stall
Standard Terminal Arrival Route
Statistics
Standby
Standard
Stormscope
Special Use Airspace
Suspend
Synthetic Vision Technology
Software
Synchronize
Synthetic Terrain
Synthetic Vision
System

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

SFC
SIAP
SID
SIG/AIR
SIGMET
SIM
SLD
SLP/SKD
SMBL
SPC
SPD
SPI
SPKR
SQ
SRVC, SVC
STAB
STAL
STAR
STATS
STBY
STD
STRMSCP
SUA
SUSP
SVT, SYN VIS
SW
SYNC
SYN TERR
SYN VIS
SYS

549

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX C

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

VLE
VLO
VMC
VMO (MMO)
VNE
VR
VX
VY
VYSE
V
V DEV
VA
VAC
VAPP
VAR
VD
VDC
VERT
Vertical Figure
of Merit
Vertical Speed
Required

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

VFOM
VFR
VHF
VI
VLOC
VM

APPENDICES

VMC
VNAV, VNV
VOL
VOR
VORTAC

INDEX

VPATH, VPTH
VPL
VPROF

550

Maximum landing gear extended speed
Maximum landing gear operating speed
Minimum Control Speed
Maximum Speed
Never-Exceed Speed
Rotate Speed
Best Angle of Climb Speed
Best Rate of Climb Speed
Best Single-Engine Rate of Climb Speed
Volts
Vertical Deviation
Heading Vector to Altitude Leg
Volts Alternating Current
VOR Approach
Variation
Heading Vector to DME Distance Leg
Volts Direct Current
Vertical
A measure of the uncertainty in the
aircraft’s vertical position.
The vertical speed necessary to descend/
climb from a current position and altitude
to a defined target position and altitude,
based upon current groundspeed.
Vertical Figure of Merit
Visual Flight Rules
Very High Frequency
Heading Vector to Intercept Leg
VOR/Localizer Receiver
Heading Vector to Manual Termination
Leg
Visual Meteorological Conditions
Vertical Navigation
Volume
VHF Omnidirectional Range
VHF Omnidirectional Range Station and
Tactical Air Navigation
Vertical Path
Vertical Protection Level
VNAV Profile, Vertical Profile

VR
VS
VSI
VSR, VS REQ
VTF

Heading Vector to Radial Leg
Vertical Speed
Vertical Speed Indicator
Vertical Speed Required
Vector to Final

W
WAAS
WARN
WATCH
WGS-84
WPT
WT
WW
WX

Watt(s), West
Wide Area Augmentation System
Warning
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight
World Geodetic System - 1984
Waypoint(s)
Weight
World Wide
Weather

XFER, XFR
XM LTNG
XPDR
XTALK
XTK

Transfer
SiriusXM Lightning
Transponder
Cross-Talk
Cross-Track

Yaw Damper

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

If a particular aspect of G1000 operational capability is not addressed by these commonly asked questions or in
the index, contact Garmin (see the copyright page or back cover for contact information) or a Garmin-authorized
dealer. Garmin is dedicated to supporting its products and customers.

What is SBAS?

EIS

The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) uses a system of ground stations to correct any GPS signal
errors. These ground stations correct for errors caused by ionospheric disturbances, timing, and satellite
orbit errors. It also provides vital integrity information regarding the health of each GPS satellite. The signal
correction is then broadcast through geostationary satellites. This correction information can then be received
by any SBAS-enabled GPS receiver.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

SBAS is designed to provide the additional accuracy, availability, and integrity necessary to enable users to rely
on GPS for all phases of flight.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

There are several SBAS systems serving different parts of the world. The Wide Area Augmentation System
(WAAS) is currently available in the United States, including Alaska and Hawaii. The European Geostationary
Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) offers coverage of Europe, parts of the middle east and northern Africa.
The Multi-functional Satellite Augmentation System (MSAS) covers mainly Japan.

How does SBAS affect approach operations?

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

LNAV/VNAV, LP, and LPV RNAV approaches use the accuracy of SBAS to include vertical (glide path) guidance
capability. The additional accuracy and vertical guidance capability allows improved instrument approaches to
an expanded number of airports throughout the U.S.

AFCS

The implementation of RNAV LP and LPV approaches further improves precision approach capabilities.
RNAV LPV approaches are designed to make full use of the improved GPS signal from the SBAS. This approach
combines localizer precision lateral guidance with vertical guidance similar to the typical Instrument Landing
System (ILS). RNAV LPV approaches allow lower approach minimums.

What is RAIM and how does it affect approach operations?

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

When SBAS is unavailable, the GPS receivers use Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) to
perform the following functions:
• Monitor and verify integrity and geometry of tracked GPS satellites
• Notify pilot when satellite conditions do not provide necessary coverage to support a certain phase of flight

APPENDICES

• Predict satellite coverage of a destination area to determine whether the number of available satellites is
sufficient to satisfy requirements (refer to the System Overview Section for instructions on RAIM prediction)
• Detect and exclude bad satellites from the navigation solution (Fault Detection and Exclusion, FDE)

INDEX

RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (4.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches).
Without SBAS or RAIM, GPS position accuracy integrity cannot be monitored.
NOTE: If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become

active, as indicated by the “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP” message and the LOI annunciation
flagging on the HSI.
190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

551

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX D
For RAIM to work correctly, the GPS receiver must track at least five satellites. A minimum of six satellites is
required to allow RAIM to eliminate a single corrupt satellite from the navigation solution.

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

RAIM ensures that satellite geometry allows for a navigation solution calculation within a specified protection
limit (2.0 nm for oceanic and en route, 1.0 nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). The
G1000 System monitors RAIM and issues an alert message when RAIM is not available (see Appendix A).
Without RAIM, GPS position accuracy cannot be monitored. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF,
the pilot must fly the missed approach procedure.

What is GSL altitude?
EIS

GSL (Geodetic Sea Level) altitude is the height above Mean Sea Level (MSL), as calculated geometrically,
generally using a global positioning system (GPS) as the primary data source. The calculated result may or may
not include a barometric component, but the primary source is geometric.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Why might there be no approaches available for a flight plan?

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Approaches are available for the final destination airport in a flight plan or as a direct-to (keep in mind
that some VOR/VORTAC identifiers are similar to airport identifiers). If a destination airport does not have a
published approach, the G1000 indicates “NONE” for the available procedures.

What happens when an approach is selected? Can a flight plan with an approach, a departure, or an
arrival be stored?

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

When an approach, departure, or arrival is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach, departure,
or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan, along with a header line showing the title of the selected
instrument procedure. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active, unless the instrument
procedure is activated. This may be done either when the procedure is loaded or at a later time.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Flight plans can also be stored with an approach, a departure, or an arrival. Note the most recent active flight
plan is restored when the system is turned on, if the aircraft position is the same as the origin airport in the most
recent active flight plan. Also, the active flight plan is overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When
storing flight plans with an approach, a departure, or an arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from
the current database to define the waypoints. If the database is changed or updated, the system automatically
updates the information, provided the procedure has not been modified. Should an approach, departure, or
arrival procedure no longer be available, the flight plan becomes locked until the procedure is deleted from the
flight plan

Can “slant Golf” (“/G”) be filed using the G1000?

APPENDICES

“/G” may be filed for a flight plan. The G1000 system meets the requirements of TSO-C145a Class 3 or TSOC145c Class 3, and ETSO C145 Class 3 installations. GPS approaches are not to be flown with an expired
database. See the approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) as well as the Aeronautical Information Manual
(AIM) for more information.

What does the OBS Softkey do?

INDEX

The OBS Softkey is used to select manual sequencing of waypoints. Activating OBS mode sets the current
active-to waypoint as the primary navigation reference and prevents the system from sequencing to the next
waypoint in a flight plan. When OBS mode is cancelled, automatic waypoint sequencing is continued, and

552

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX D
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

the G1000 automatically activates the next waypoint in the flight plan once the aircraft has crossed the present
active waypoint.
•
•
•
•

OBS
Manual sequencing - ‘holds’ on selected waypoint
Manually select course to waypoint from HSI
Indicates ‘TO’ or ‘FROM’ waypoint
Cannot be set for final approach course or published holding patterns

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

•
•
•
•

Normal (OBS not activated)
Automatic sequencing of waypoints
Manual course change on HSI not possible
Always navigates ‘TO’ the active waypoint
Must be in this mode for final approach course

EIS

When OBS mode is active, the G1000 allows the pilot to set a desired course to/from a waypoint using the
CRS/BARO Knob and HSI (much like a VOR).

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

The most common application for using the OBS Softkey is the missed approach. The G1000 suspends
automatic waypoint sequencing (indicated by a ‘SUSP’ annunciation placed on the HSI) when the missed
approach point (MAP) is crossed. This prevents the G1000 from automatically sequencing to the missed
approach holding point (MAHP). During this time, the OBS Softkey designation changes to SUSP. Pressing
the SUSP Softkey reactivates automatic waypoint sequencing. The OBS Softkey then resumes its normal
functionality.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Why might the G1000 not automatically sequence to the next waypoint?
The G1000 only sequences flight plan waypoints when automatic sequencing is enabled (i.e., no ‘OBS’ or
‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI). For automatic sequencing to occur, the aircraft must also cross the bisector of
the turn being navigated. The bisector is a line passing through the waypoint common to two flight plan legs
at an equal angle from each leg.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

How can a waypoint be skipped in an approach, a departure, or an arrival?

AFCS

The G1000 allows the pilot to manually select any approach, departure, or arrival leg as the active leg of
the flight plan. This procedure is performed on the MFD from the Active Flight Plan Page by highlighting the
desired waypoint and pressing the ACT LEG Softkey then the ENT Key to approve the selection. The GPS then
provides navigation along the selected flight plan leg.

When does turn anticipation begin?

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

The G1000 smooths adjacent leg transitions based on a normal 15° bank angle (with the ability to roll up to
30°) and provides three pilot cues for turn anticipation:
• A waypoint alert (‘Next DTK ###° in # seconds’ or ‘Next HDG ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10
seconds before the turn point and flashes as it counts down to zero.

APPENDICES

• A flashing turn advisory (‘Turn [right/left] to ###° in # seconds’) appears on the PFD 10 seconds before the
turn and flashes as it counts down to zero. ‘Turn [right/left] to ###° now’ or ‘Next [DTK/HDG] to ###° now’
is displayed when the pilot is to begin the turn and the HSI (GPS mode) automatically sequences to the next
DTK or HDG value.
• The To/From indicator on the HSI flips momentarily to indicate that the midpoint of the turn has been
crossed.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

553

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX D
When does the CDI scale change?

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Once a departure is activated, the G1000 Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) full scale deflection is set to 0.3
nm. The CDI scale changes to 1.0 nm (terminal mode) then ramps up to 2.0 nm (enroute mode) at 30 nm
from the departure airport. When 31 nm from the destination, the CDI scale smoothly transition from 2.0 nm
back to 1.0 nm (terminal mode). At 2.0 nm before the FAF during an active approach, the CDI scale transitions
down further based on the type of approach activated (LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LPV). When a missed approach
is activated, the CDI is set to 0.3 nm. See the Flight Instruments Section for more details on CDI scaling.

Why does the HSI not respond like a VOR when OBS mode is active?

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

Unlike a VOR, the CDI scale used on GPS equipment is based on the crosstrack distance to the desired
course, not on the angular relationship to the destination. Therefore, the CDI deflection on the GPS is constant
regardless of the distance to the destination and does not become less sensitive when further away from the
destination.

What is the correct missed approach procedure? How is the missed approach holding point selected?

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

To comply with TSO specifications, the G1000 does not automatically sequence past the MAP. The first
waypoint in the missed approach procedure becomes the active waypoint when the SUSP Softkey is selected
after crossing the MAP. All published missed approach procedures must be followed, as indicated on the
approach plate.
To execute the missed approach procedure prior to the MAP (not recommended), select the Active Flight Plan
Page and use the ACT LEG Softkey to activate the missed approach portion of the procedure.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

After a missed approach, how can the same approach be re-selected? How can a new approach be
activated?
NOTE: Do not attempt to reactivate the current approach prior to crossing the missed approach point

AFCS

(MAP). If an attempt to do so is made, an alert message “Are you sure you want to discontinue the current
approach?” appears. The G1000 directs the pilot back to the transition waypoint and does not take into
consideration any missed approach procedures, if the current approach is reactivated.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

After flying the missed approach procedure, the pilot may reactivate the same approach for another attempt by
pressing the PROC Key. Once the clearance is given for another attempt, activate the approach by highlighting
‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ using the large FMS Knob and pressing the ENT Key. The G1000 provides navigation
along the desired course to the waypoint and rejoins the approach in sequence from that point.

APPENDICES

To activate a new approach for the same airport, select the new procedure by pressing the PROC Key. Choose
‘SELECT APPROACH’, select the desired approach from the list shown, and press the ENT Key. Select the
desired transition, then activate the approach using the ENT Key.

INDEX

To activate a new approach to a different airport, press the Direct-to Key and select the desired airport using
the FMS Knobs. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected airport, then follow the steps in the preceding
paragraph to select an approach for the new airport.

554

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX E
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

GENERAL TIS INFORMATION

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

NOTE: Aircraft without an operating transponder are invisible to TIS.
NOTE: TIS is not intended to be used as a collision avoidance system and does not relieve the pilot of the

responsibility to “see and avoid” other aircraft. TIS should not be used for avoidance maneuvers during
instrument meterorlogical conditions (IMC) or when there is no visual contact with the intruder aircraft.

EIS

The Traffic Information Service (TIS) provides traffic advisory information to non-TAS/TCAS-equipped aircraft.
TIS is a ground-based service providing the relative locations of all ATCRBS Mode-A and Mode-C transponder
equipped aircraft within a specified service volume. The TIS ground sensor uses real-time track reports to
generate traffic notification. The G1000 System displays TIS traffic information on the Traffic Map Page of the
MFD. TIS information may also be displayed for overlay on the MFD Navigation Map Page, as well as on the PFD
Inset Map. Surveillance data includes all transponder-equipped aircraft within the coverage volume. The G1000
System displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3,000 feet below, to 3,500 feet above the
requesting aircraft.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

The main difference between the Traffic Information System (TIS) and Traffic Advisory (TAS) or Traffic Collision
Avoidance Systems (TCAS) is the source of surveillance data. TAS/TCAS uses an airborne interrogator with a halfsecond update rate, while TIS utilizes the terminal Mode-S ground interrogator and accompanying data link to
provide a five-second update rate. TIS and TAS/TCAS have similar ranges.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

TIS relies on surveillance of the Mode-S radar system, which is a “secondary surveillance” radar system similar
to that used by ATCRBS. Many limitations are inherent in secondary radar surveillance. Information provided by
TIS is neither better nor more accurate than the information used by ATC. TIS is intended only to assist in visual
acquisition of other aircraft in visual meteorological conditions (VMC). While TIS is a useful aid for visual traffic
avoidance, system limitations must be considered to ensure proper use. No recommended avoidance maneuvers
are given, nor authorized, as a direct result of a TIS intruder display or TIS advisory.

AFCS

• TIS operation may be intermittent during turns or other maneuvering.

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

• TIS is dependent on two-way, line-of-sight communications between the aircraft and the Mode-S radar antenna.
Whenever the structure of the aircraft comes between the transponder antenna and the ground-based radar
antenna, the signal may be temporarily interrupted.
NOTE: Refer to the TIS Limitations section of the Aeronautical Information Manual (AIM) for a more

comprehensive explanation of limitations and anomalies associated with TIS.

APPENDICES

NOTE: TIS is unavailable at low altitudes in many areas of the United States. This is often the case in

mountainous regions.

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

555

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX E

WARNING: Garmin is not responsible for Mode S geographical coverage. Operation of the ground stations

is the responsibility of the FAA. Refer to the AIM for a Terminal Mode S radar site map.

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

TIS information is collected during a single radar sweep. Collected information is then sent through the Mode
S uplink on the next radar sweep. Because of this, the surveillance information is approximately five seconds old.
TIS ground station tracking software uses prediction algorithms to compensate for this delay. These algorithms
use track history data to calculate expected intruder positions consistent with the time of display. Occasionally,
aircraft maneuvering may cause variations in this calculation and create slight errors on the Traffic Map Page which
affect relative bearing information and the target track vector and may delay display of the intruder information.
However, intruder distance and altitude typically remain relatively accurate and may be used to assist in spotting
traffic. The following errors are common examples:

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

• When the client or intruder aircraft maneuvers excessively or abruptly, the tracking algorithm may report
incorrect horizontal position until the maneuvering aircraft stabilizes.
• When a rapidly closing intruder is on a course that intercepts the client aircraft course at a shallow angle
(either overtaking or head-on) and either aircraft abruptly changes course within 0.25 nm, TIS may display the
intruder aircraft on the incorrect side of the client aircraft.

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

These are rare occurrences and are typically resolved within a few radar sweeps once the client/intruder aircraft
course stabilizes.

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Pilots using TIS can provide valuable assistance in the correction of malfunctions by reporting observations
of undesirable performance. Reports should identify the time of observation, location, type and identity of the
aircraft, and describe the condition observed. Reports should also include the type of transponder and transponder
software version. Since TIS performance is monitored by maintenance personnel, not ATC, malfunctions should
be reported in the following ways:
• By telephone to the nearest Flight Service Station (FSS) facility

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

• By FAA Form 8000-7, Safety Improvement Report (postage-paid card can be obtained at FAA FSSs, General
Aviation District Offices, Flight Standards District Offices, and General Aviation Fixed Base Operators)

556

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX F
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

MAP SYMBOLS
AIRPORTS

BASEMAP
Symbol

Item
Interstate Highway

Non-towered, Non-serviced Airport

State Highway

Towered, Non-serviced Airport

US Highway

Symbol

EIS

Unknown Airport

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Item

National Highway

Non-towered, Serviced Airport

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

City

Towered, Serviced Airport

State/Province Border

Restricted (Private) Airport
Heliport

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

International Border
Road

NAVAIDS

Railroad
Symbol

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Item

Latitude/Longitude

Intersection
LOM (compass locator at outer marker)

AIRSPACE BOUNDARIES

VOR/ILS

Warning Area Prohibited Area
Alert Area
Restricted Area
Caution Area Training Area
Danger Area
Unknown Area
Class C
Terminal Radar Service Area
Mode C Area

VORTAC
TACAN

APPENDICES

Mode C Tower Area

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

VOR/DME

Symbol

AFCS

VOR

Item
ICAO Control Area
Class B Airspace

NDB (non-directional radio beacon)

Military Operations Area (MOA)
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

557

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX F
HAZARD AVOIDANCE FEATURES

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

This table identifies the symbols displayed in the
lower right corner of PFD or MFD maps to indicate
which hazard avoidance features are activated for
display.
Feature

Symbol

TAWS display enabled
EIS

Traffic display enabled

Feature
Air Report (AIREPs)
Turbulence (TURB)
Loss of hazard avoidance feature, (a
white X is shown over the symbol to
indicate not available; e.g., traffic)

MISCELLANEOUS
Item

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Stormscope display enabled
NEXRAD display enabled

ARTCC Frequency or FSS Frequency

Cloud Top display enabled

Map Pointer (when panning)

Echo Top display enabled

Elevation Pointer
(on Topography Scale when panning)

XM Lightning display enabled

Measuring Pointer

Cell Movement display enabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Symbol

SIGMETs/AIRMETs display enabled
METARs display enabled

Symbol

Wind Vector
Overzoom Indicator
User Waypoint

AFCS

City Forecast display enabled
Vertical Navigation Along Track Waypoint
Surface Analysis display enabled

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Freezing Levels display enabled
Winds Aloft display enabled

INDEX

APPENDICES

County Warnings display enabled

Parallel Track Waypoint
Unanchored Flight Path Waypoint
Top of Descent (TOD)

Cyclone Warnings display enabled

Bottom of Descent (BOD)

Icing Potential (CIP and SLD) (ICNG)

Navigating using Dead Reckoning

Pilot Weather Report (PIREPs)

558

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

APPENDIX F
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

TRAFFIC
Item

Symbol

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Non-threat Traffic (hollow diamond)
Proximity Advisory (TAS only)
Traffic Advisory, Out of Range

EIS

Traffic Advisory
Traffic Advisory (TA) arrow with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track.

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Proximity Advisory (PA) arrow with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the aircraft track .
Non-threat traffic arrow with ADS-B directional information. Points in the direction of the intruder aircraft track .

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

PA or Non-threat traffic arrow with ADS-B directional information, but positional accuracy is degraded. Points in
the direction of the aircraft track

TERRAIN AVOIDANCE COLORS AND SYMBOLS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold

1000 ft

AFCS

Terrain Color
Terrain Location
Red (WARNING) Terrain above, or within 100 ft below the aircraft altitude
Yellow (CAUTION) Terrain between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black
Terrain more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Terrain Proximity Color Chart

APPENDICES
INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

559

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

APPENDIX F

Potential Impact Point

Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Terrai
Projected Flight Path

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

100 ft Threshold

EIS

1000 ft

Unlighted Obstacle

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Terrain-SVS & TAWS Color Chart

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Terrain-SVS & TAWS Potential Impact Points

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

Obstacle Symbol

Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Height < 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL < 1000 ft AGL > 1000 ft AGL

Obstacle
Color

Obstacle Location

Red
(WARNING)

Obstacle within 100 ft of
or above aircraft altitude

Yellow
(CAUTION)

Obstacle within 1000 ft of
aircraft altitude

Gray

Obstacle more than 1000
ft below aircraft altitude

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

Obstacle Symbols and Colors

560

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

INDEX

EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

B
Backlighting-------------------------------------------------- 47
Barometric altimeter setting---------------------------50, 56
Basic Empty Weight----------------------------------------250
Basic Operating Weight------------------------------------250
Battery
Current------------------------------------------------------ 86
Bearing/distance, measuring------------------------------142
Bearing information-------------------------------------51, 63
Bearing pointer----------------------------------------------- 62
Bearing source----------------------------------------------- 63

AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

C
Calibrated Airspeed-----------------------------------------246
Cargo---------------------------------------------------------251
CDI---------------------------- 238, 257, 268, 276, 283, 523
CELL MOV Softkey------------------------------------------305
Chart Not Available---------------------------------- 454, 475
Chart options----------------------------------------- 462, 482
Chart setup box-------------------------------------- 468, 486
ChartView---------------------------------431, 452, 453, 471
ChartView database----------------------------------------471
ChartView plan view---------------------------------------463

INDEX

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

APPENDICES

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Approach box-----------------------------------------------477
Approach channel----------------------------------- 206, 239
Approach Mode-------------------------------------- 407, 422
Approach Mode, AFCS-------------------------------------424
APR softkey------------------------------------------- 241, 249
Arrival procedure------190, 204, 236, 238, 266, 268, 277
Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)----- 3, 7,
12–13
Attitude indicator----------------------------------------50, 54
Audio alerting system--------------------------------------512
Audio Panel-------------------------------------------------- 2, 8
Audio Panel Fail-Safe Operation--------------------------129
Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast--------367
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS)--------- 381–430
Alerts-------------------------------------------------------526
Alerts and annunciations------------------------ 428–429
Controls-------------------------------------------- 383–384
Status Annunciations------------------------------------428
Status Box-------------------------------------------------386
Automatic squelch------------------------------------------106
Autopilot-----------------------------------------------------381
Autopilot Disconnect-------------------------- 384, 401, 410
Auto-tuning, COM------------------------------------------101
Auto-tuning, NAV------------------------------------ 110, 114
Auto Zoom---------------------------------------------------136
AUX - system status page-450, 451, 471, 472, 488, 489,
490, 493
Aviation Symbols------------------------------------- 147, 190

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

Activate a Flight Plan---------------------------------------209
Active database-------------------------------------- 532, 533
Active frequency--------------------------------------- 98, 107
AC-U-KWIK------------------------------------- 431, 491, 537
ADS-B---------------------------------------------------------367
AFCS Status Box--------------------------------------------386
AHRS-----------------------------------------------12, 521, 522
Aircraft alerts------------------------------------------------513
Air Data Computer (ADC)------------------------------------ 3
Airport
Information-----------------------------------------------167
Nearest----------------------------------------------------- 42
Airport Directory-------------------------431, 491, 492, 537
Airspace Alerts--------------------------------- 182, 183, 285
Airspeed indicator---------------------------------------50, 52
Airspeed Reference---------------------------------- 393–394
Airways
Collapsed--------------------------------------------------222
Expanded--------------------------------------------------222
Alerting system----------------------------------------------511
Alerts---------------------------------------------------------511
Aircraft-----------------------------------------------------512
Airspace---------------------------------------------------- 40
Arrival------------------------------------------------------- 40
Audio voice------------------------------------------ 40, 525
Along Track Offset----------------------------------- 213, 214
ALT------------------------------------------------------------281
Altimeter--------------------------------------------------50, 55
Altitude
Buffer------------------------------------------------------- 40
Constraints------------------------------------------------229
Altitude alerting---------------------------------------------- 76
Altitude constraints-----------------------------------------268
Altitude Hold------------------------------------------------- 20
Altitude Hold Mode----------------------------------------391
Altitude Reference----------------------------- 390, 391, 397
Ammeter------------------------------------------------------ 86
Annunciations
System--------------------------------------------------9, 513
Test tone----------------------------------------- 10, 11, 512
Annunciator lights------------------------------------------122
AOPA-------------------------------------------- 431, 491, 537
AOPA Airport Directory------------------------------ 492, 493
AP-------------------------------------------------------------526
Approach-----------------------------------------------------552
Activating-------------------------------------------------242
ILS----------------------------------------------------------422
Loading--------------------------------------- 206, 239, 241
Missed-----------------------------------------------------426
Removing--------------------------------------------------242
WAAS------------------------------------------------------424

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

I-1

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

INDEX

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

EIS

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

ChartView profile view-------------------------------------463
CLD TOP Softkey--------------------------------------------303
Closest Point-------------------------------------------------222
COM channel spacing--------------------------------------105
COM Frequency Box----------------------------------------- 98
Command Bars----------------------------------------------387
Communication (COM) frequency box------------------- 50
COM Tuning Failure-----------------------------------------129
Controls---------------------------------------------------18, 20
AFCS------------------------------------------------ 383–384
PFD/MFD------------------------------------------18–19, 29
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 21–24
Control Wheel Steering (CWS)--------------------- 384, 410
Copy a Flight Plan------------------------------------------209
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)-----------------42, 64–68
Changing scale-------------------------------------------554
Course To Altitude------------------------------------------245
Crew Alerting System (CAS)
Inhibits-----------------------------------------------------512

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Database(s)---------------------------------------6, 7, 10, 531
Database Synchronization-------------------------- 537, 538
Data entry------------------------------------------------ 28–29
Data Link Receiver---------------------------------------4, 510
Datalink receiver troubleshooting------------------------509
Data logging-------------------------------------------------502
Date, time----------------------------------------------------- 38
Day/Night views-------------------------------------- 468, 486
Day view----------------------------------468, 469, 486, 487
DB Mismatch------------------------------------------------535
DC bus--------------------------------------------------------- 86
Dead reckoning---------------------------------------------- 79
DEC FUEL softkey-------------------------------------------- 87
Decision height----------------------------------------------- 77
Declutter
Maps-------------------------------------------------------- 27
Declutter, display--------------------------------------------- 80
Delete
Entire airway--------------------------------------- 211, 212
Entire procedure----------------------------------- 211, 212
Flight plan items-----------------------------------------210
Flight plans------------------------------------------------209
Individual waypoint------------------------------- 210, 211
Density Altitude---------------------------------------------248
Departure
Procedure------------------------------202, 216, 233, 235
Select------------------------------------233, 236, 239, 242
Time--------------------------------------------------------246
Dilution of Precision (DOP)--------------------------------- 17
Direct-to-- 160, 184, 185, 186, 187, 188, 227, 228, 266,
268, 283
Display backup-------------------------------------------- 8, 97

I-2

Display controls----------------------------------------- 18–25
DME Information Window---------------------------------- 63
Dual navigation database---------------------------------533

E
ECHO TOP Softkey------------------------------------------302
Electronic Stability----------------------------------- 431, 503
Emergency Frequency--------------------------------------129
Endurance, calculated (ENDUR)-----------------------85, 87
Engine manifold pressure-------------------------------83, 85
Entering Flight ID------------------------------------ 116, 121
Entertainment inputs---------------------------------------127
ESP---------------------------------- 431, 503, 504, 505, 506
Estimated Landing Fuel------------------------------------252
Estimated Position Error (EPE)----------------------------- 17
Excess Fuel Weight-----------------------------------------252
Extended squitter-------------------------------------------367

F
FD-------------------------------------------------------- 20, 526
Field of View (SVS)------------------------------------------158
Flight Data Logging----------------------------------------431
Flight director------------------------------------------------381
Switching--------------------------------------------------382
Flight ID----------------------------------------------- 116, 121
Flight instruments--------------------------------------- 49–64
Flight level change------------------------------------------- 21
Flight Level Change Mode-------------------------- 393, 418
Flight Plan
Closest point to reference------------------------------222
Import/Export Messages--------------------------------529
Storing-----------------------------------------------------552
FliteCharts-------------------------------------------- 431, 473
FliteCharts cycle---------------------------------------------489
FliteCharts expiration--------------------------------------489
FliteCharts functions---------------------------------------474
FPA----------------------------------------------------- 229, 273
Frequency
Nearest----------------------------------------------------180
Frequency spacing------------------------------------------105
Frequently asked questions--------------------------------551
Fuel
Calculations------------------------------------------------ 87
Display------------------------------------------------------ 89
Efficiency--------------------------------------------------248
Endurance-------------------------------------------------248
Quantity---------------------------------------------------- 83
Remaining-------------------------------------------------248
Required---------------------------------------------------248
Reserve----------------------------------------------------- 88
Statistics---------------------------------------------------248
Fuel on Board---------------------------------- 248, 251, 252
Fuel Range Ring---------------------------------------------- 88

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

INDEX

Land Symbols------------------------------------------------146
Level Mode--------------------------------------------------503
Line Replaceable Units (LRU)------------------------ 2–5, 10
LNAV----------------------------------------------------------257
LO SENS------------------------------------------------------115
LPV----------------------------------------------- 257, 283, 414

APPENDICES

Jeppesen aviation database-------------------------------532

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

National Weather Service----------------------------------315
Navigation Mode----------------------- 405–406, 416–417
Navigation mode selection--------------------------------107
Navigation (NAV)
Database------------------------------------- 186, 229, 230
Map-------------------------------------131, 142, 165, 186
Status Box-------------------------------------------------- 41
Navigation (NAV) frequency box-------------------------- 50
Navigation source-------------------------------------- 64–65
Navigation status box--------------------------------------- 50
Nav radio selection-----------------------------------------107
Nearest
Airports-25, 32, 42, 131, 132, 160, 164, 165, 166, 167,
186, 241
Page------------------------------------------- 165, 166, 167
Airspaces----------------------------32, 40, 180, 181, 182
Intersections-----------------------------------32, 168, 169
NDB--------------------------------------------------- 32, 171
User Waypoint--------------------------------------------175
VOR---------------------------------------------32, 168, 173
Nearest airports, frequency tuning-----------------------101
NEXRAD Softkey--------------------------------------------298
Night view--------------------------------468, 469, 486, 487
Non-path descent------------------------------397, 420–421
Normal display operation------------------------------------- 8

AFCS

IDENT function--------------------------------------- 118, 121
ID indicator--------------------------------------------------109
ILS approach-------------------------------------------------422
Indicated Altitude-------------------------------------------246
Inset map----------------------------------------------------- 51
Intercom system (ICS)--------------------------------------127
Intersection
Information---------------------------------------- 168–169
Inverting a flight plan--------------------------------------209
IOI------------------------------------------341, 351, 527, 528

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Heading------------------------------------------------------- 50
Heading bug-------------------------------------------------- 50
Heading Select----------------------------------------------- 21
Heading Select Mode--------------------------------------404
HI SENS-------------------------------------------------------115
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)-----------------------1 9 ,
23, 25, 39, 50, 59–61, 239, 240, 242, 257, 268, 277, 281,
283, 285, 553, 554
HSI double green arrow------------------------------------107
HSI magenta arrow-----------------------------------------107
HSI single green arrow-------------------------------------107

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Magnetic Field Variation Database-----------------------541
Map Panning------------------------------------------------138
Map symbols------------------------------------------------557
Marker beacon----------------------------------------------115
Marker beacon annunciations----------------------------- 75
MASQ processing-------------------------------------------- 93
Measurement units------------------------------------------ 39
Menus--------------------------------------------------------- 28
Message advisories--------- 516, 517, 518, 521, 522, 523
Messages
Reminder--------------------------------------------------- 45
MET-----------------------------------------------------------526
Minimum descent altitude---------------------------------- 77
Minimums----------------------------------------------------525
Missed Approach----------- 190, 243, 253, 257, 283, 426
MKR/MUTE--------------------------------------------------115
Mode S------------------------------------------------ 116, 117
Mode selection softkeys---------------------------- 116, 117
Morse code identifier---------------------------------------109
Multi Function Display (MFD)-------------------------------- 2
Controls----------------------------------------------- 18–19
Softkeys----------------------------------------------------- 26

EIS

GBT-----------------------------------------------------------367
Geodetic sea level----------------------------- 325, 334, 344
Glidepath-----------------------------------------------------281
Glidepath indicator------------------------------------------ 58
Glidepath Mode-------------------------------------- 398, 407
Glidepath Mode (GP)---------------------------------------424
Glideslope----------------------------------------------------281
Glideslope indicator----------------------------------------- 58
Glideslope Mode------------------------------------- 400, 422
Go Around Mode------------------------------401, 426–427
GPS receiver--------------------------------------------- 13–15
GPS Window-------------------------------------------------538
Ground-Based Transceivers--------------------------------367
GSL----------------------------------------------- 325, 334, 344
GTX 33 Mode S Transponders----------------------------116

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

I-3

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

INDEX
O

OBS mode----------------------------------------------------- 69
Obstacles---------------------------------------------- 518, 519
Odometer----------------------------------------------------- 45
Oil, engine
Pressure---------------------------------------------------- 89
Temperature----------------------------------------------- 89
Omni Bearing Selector (OBS)----------------------- 552–553
Other Statistics--------------------------------------- 246, 248
Outside air temperature------------------------------------ 50

SafeTaxi------------------------------------------ 431, 446, 449
SafeTaxi database-------------------------------------------451
SBAS-------------------------- 253, 255, 256, 257, 519, 551
Scheduler------------------------------ 45–46, 431–432, 499
Secure Digital (SD) card---------------------------------6, 531
Selected Altitude------------ 389, 390, 392, 393, 394, 397
Selected Altitude Capture Mode-389, 390, 391, 392, 394
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc----------------------------159
Selected course-------------------------------------------51, 60
Selected Heading--------------------------------- 51, 60, 404
Selecting a COM radio-------------------------------------- 98
Sequencing waypoints
Automatic-------------------------------------------------553
SiriusXM
Radio-------------------------------------------------------288
Receiver troubleshooting-------------------------------323
XM Satellite Weather------------------------------------288
NEXRAD---------------------------------------------------298
SiriusXM radio volume-------------------------------------498
SiriusXM Weather
AIREPs-----------------------------------------------------319
Icing--------------------------------------------------------317
PIREPs-----------------------------------------------------319
Turbulence------------------------------------------ 317, 318
Slip/Skid indicator----------------------------------------50, 54
Softkeys------------------------------------------------------- 50
EIS-------------------------------------------------------27, 84
LTNG-------------------------------------------------------304
MFD--------------------------------------------------------- 26
PFD----------------------------------------------------- 21–23
Speaker-------------------------------------------------------122
Split COM operation----------------------------------------126
SQ annunciation--------------------------------------------124
Standby database-------------------------------------------533
Standby frequency-------------------------------98, 101, 107
Standby frequency field------------------------------------- 98
Standby Navigation Database--------------------- 534, 535
Stereo headsets---------------------------------------------122
Stuck microphone-------------------------------------------129
Sunrise/Sunset-----------------------------------------------247
SUSP----------------------------------------------------------- 70
SVS troubleshooting----------------------------------------507
Symbols, map------------------------------------------------557
Synthetic vision (SVS)------------------------------- 431, 432
System
Annunciations-----------------------------------------9, 511
Message advisories--------------------------------------516
Power-up----------------------------------------------------- 7
Time--------------------------------------------------------- 38
System alerting----------------------------------------------- 74
System time--------------------------------------------------- 50

EIS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

Page
Menus------------------------------------------------------ 28
Page groups--------------------------------------------- 30–33
Parallel Track------------------------------------------ 215, 216
Passenger address------------------------------------------125
Passengers---------------------------------------------------251
PA system----------------------------------------------------125
PFDSee Primary Flight Display (PFD)
PFD failure---------------------------------------------------129
Pilot and Stores Weight------------------------------------250
Pilot profiles--------------------------------------------- 35–36
Pitch hold----------------------------------------------------- 21
Pitch Hold Mode--------------------------------------------389
Power-up, system---------------------------------------------- 7
Primary Flight Display (PFD)---------------------------------- 2
Controls--------------------------------------18–19, 20–21
Softkeys------------------------------------------------ 21–23
Procedures
GFC 700-------------------------------------------- 414–427

Q
AFCS

Quick tuning 121.500 MHz-------------------------------100

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

Range---------------------------------------------------------156
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM)----1 5 ,
15–16, 238, 253, 254, 255, 256
Reminder messages----------------------------------------- 45
Required Vertical Speed------------------------------------274
Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI)--------- 274, 275
Reserve fuel--------------------------------------------------- 88
Reversionary Mode-----------------------------------------129
ROC----------------------------------------341, 351, 527, 528
Roll Hold Mode---------------------------------------------403
Runway
Minimum length------------------------------------------- 43
Surface------------------------------------------------------ 42
RX indicator--------------------------------------------------- 99

I-4

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

INDEX

TA-------------------------------------------------------------525
Tachometer-----------------------------------------------83, 85
TAF------------------------------------------------------------307
Takeoff Mode------------------------------------------------401
TAS Traffic
Non-Threat Traffic----------------------------------------367
PA----------------------------------------------------------367
Proximity Advisory---------------------------------------367
TAWS
Five-Hundred Aural Alert--------------------------------355
TAWS-B------------------------------------------------ 344, 528
ALERTS-----------------------------------------------------528
System Status Annunciations---------------------------529
Temporary Flight Restrictions-----------------------------320
Terminal procedures charts------------------------- 454, 475
Terrain------------------------------------------- 518, 527, 528
Color indications-----------------------------------------559
Terrain awareness and warning system------------------ 76
Terrain Proximity--------------------------------------------325
Terrain-SVS---------------------------------------------------334
Alerts-------------------------------------------------------527
System Status Annunciations---------------------------527
TFR------------------------------------------------------------320
Timer----------------------------------------------------------523
Departure--------------------------------------------------- 44
Flight-------------------------------------------------------- 44
TOPO DATA------------------------------------- 143, 144, 153
Top of Descent (TOD)-------------------------- 273, 274, 280
TOPO SCALE-------------------------------------------------145
Track indicator------------------------------------------------ 59
Traffic Advisory (TA)----------------------------------------525
Traffic Annunciation-------------------------------------51, 75
Traffic Information Service (TIS)-------------------- 555–556
Voice alerts------------------------------------------------- 75
Transponder----------------------------------------------------- 3
Transponder code entry------------------------------------119
Transponder data box--------------------------------------- 93
Transponder ground mode--------------------------------117
Transponder mode field-------------------------93, 117, 118
Transponder standby mode-------------------------------118
Transponder status box------------------------------------- 50
Trip
Planning-------------------------------------- 246, 247, 248
Statistics----------------------------------------45, 247, 248
True Airspeed (TAS)------------------------- 50, 52, 248, 521
Turn anticipation--------------------------------------------553
Turn rate indicator---------------------------------------50, 62
TX indicator--------------------------------------------------- 99

Unable to display chart----------------------------- 454, 475
Units, measurement----------------------------------------- 39
Updating Garmin databases------------------------------451
User-Defined Holding Pattern-----------------------------224

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

EIS

VDISee Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
Vertical
Deviation
Guidance--------------------------------------------------230
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------228
Navigation------------------------------------------------229
Speed
Guidance--------------------------------------------------230
Vertical deviation-------------------------------------------396
Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)------------------ 274, 275
Vertical navigation
Direct-to---------------------------------------------------228
Vertical Navigation flight control------------------ 394–398
Vertical Path Tracking Mode------------------394–395, 419
Vertical speed------------------------------------------------ 21
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)------------------- 50, 58, 275
Vertical Speed Mode---------------------------------------392
Vertical Speed Reference----------------------------------392
Vertical track-------------------------------------------------525
VFR code-----------------------------------------------------120
VNAV---------------------------------------------------------188
VNAV Target Altitude-------------------------------- 394–397
VNAV Target Altitude Capture Mode--------------------397
VNV---------------------------------------------------- 273, 524
Guidance
Disabling--------------------------------------------------227
Enabling---------------------------------------------------227
VNV indications---------------------------------------------- 73
Voice alerts, TIS Traffic--------------------------------- 75, 362
VOL annunciation-------------------------------------------124
Volume-------------------------------------------------------498
VOR, NearestSee Nearest: VOR
VOR selection------------------------------------------------107
VSISee Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
VS TGT------------------------------------------------- 229, 273

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES

W
WAAS-------------------------------------------- 257, 414, 551
WAAS precision approach---------------------------------424
Waypoint
Automatic sequencing----------------------------------553
Skipping---------------------------------------------------553

INDEX

190-01461-01 Rev. A

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

I-5

SYSTEM
OVERVIEW

Waypoint Selection Submenu----------185, 193, 197, 253
Weather (real-time)-------------------------------------------- 4
Wind--------------------------------------------------- 134, 155
WIND Softkey------------------------------------------------312

FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS

INDEX

EIS

XM
Radio-------------------------------------------------------494
Receiver troubleshooting-------------------------------509
XM active channel------------------------------------------496
XM channel list----------------------------------------------496
XM presets---------------------------------------------------497
XM radio-----------------------------------------------------495
XM Satellite Radio---------------------------------------4, 494
XM service class---------------------------------------------495

AUDIO PANEL
& CNS

INDEX

APPENDICES

ADDITIONAL
FEATURES

AFCS

HAZARD
AVOIDANCE

FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT

Zoom
Auto--------------------------------------------------------136

I-6

Garmin G1000 Pilot’s Guide for the Piper PA-44-180 Seminole

190-01461-01 Rev. A

G1000 Integrated Avionic System
®

7
5

D.C.
ELEC.

29.9

10
5

VERTICAL SPEED
100 FEET PER MINUTE

UP
20

DOWN

TURN COORDINATOR

5
10

NO PITCH
INFORMATION

Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411 f:503.364.2138

Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House,
Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire
SO40 9LR U.K.
p:44 (0) 23 8052 4000
f:44 (0) 23 8052 4004
Aviation Support:44 (0) 87 0850 1243

Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099

www.garmin.com

190-01404-01
Revision A

240

11900

225

11800

210

11700
10

200

1
500

11600
2

360‘

190

TAS 269KT

29.86IN

GPS

ENR

E
12

Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200 f:913.397.8282

12000

250

Piper PA-34-220T
Seneca

2 MIN.

In Hg

29.8

ALT

260

S
Piper PA-34-220T
Seneca
21

18000

FEET

G1000 Pilot’s Guide

100

PILOT’S GUIDE

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Tagged PDF                      : Yes
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Create Date                     : 2014:10:08 11:29:23-05:00
Modify Date                     : 2014:11:21 10:25:05-06:00
Metadata Date                   : 2014:11:21 10:25:05-06:00
Creator Tool                    : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Windows)
Version ID                      : 1
Instance ID                     : uuid:0c70af58-7a74-4bb7-bc80-e6ad9517badc
Original Document ID            : adobe:docid:indd:78fc6a7a-d557-11de-9121-cf6d32bbd5dd
Document ID                     : xmp.id:BEBA3D43084FE411B10994603077F90B
Rendition Class                 : proof:pdf
Derived From Instance ID        : xmp.iid:C14A67D4044FE411B10994603077F90B
Derived From Document ID        : xmp.did:B9AA9A0EFD4EE411B10994603077F90B
Derived From Original Document ID: adobe:docid:indd:78fc6a7a-d557-11de-9121-cf6d32bbd5dd
Derived From Version ID         : 1
Derived From Rendition Class    : default
History Action                  : converted
History Parameters              : from application/x-indesign to application/pdf
History Software Agent          : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Windows)
History Changed                 : /
History When                    : 2014:10:08 11:29:23-05:00
Format                          : application/pdf
Producer                        : Adobe PDF Library 10.0.1
Trapped                         : False
Page Count                      : 582
Creator                         : Adobe InDesign CS6 (Windows)

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Garmin Software Version 1983 00 Pilots Guide

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation